2007 Pontiac G6 Owner Manual M - General Motors Canada · 2007 Pontiac G6 Owner Manual M 1. ... PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and the name G6 are registered ... Part No. 15864101 B

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 9Rear Seats ............................................. 20Safety Belts ............................................ 22Child Restraints ...................................... 46Airbag System ........................................ 78Restraint System Check ......................... 97

Features and Controls ................................ 99Keys ..................................................... 101Doors and Locks .................................. 110Windows ............................................... 116Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 119Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ....... 123Mirrors .................................................. 144OnStar® System ................................... 150

Storage Areas ...................................... 153Sunroof ................................................ 154Retractable Hardtop .............................. 157

Instrument Panel ....................................... 163Instrument Panel Overview ................... 166Climate Controls ................................... 183Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 193Driver Information Center (DIC) ............ 210Audio System(s) ................................... 220

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 254Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 260Towing ................................................. 302

2007 Pontiac G6 Owner Manual M

1

Service and Appearance Care .................. 313Service ................................................. 316Fuel ...................................................... 318Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 322Bulb Replacement ................................ 366Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement .... 373Tires ..................................................... 374Appearance Care .................................. 408Vehicle Identification ............................. 417Electrical System .................................. 418Capacities and Specifications ................ 428

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 431Maintenance Schedule .......................... 432

Customer Assistance Information ............. 453Customer Assistance and Information ..... 454Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 469Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ....... 473

Index .......................................................... 475

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and thename G6 are registered trademarks of GeneralMotors Corporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Pontiac Division whenever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more than oneentertainment system may be offered or yourvehicle may have been ordered without a frontpassenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed while you are on the road. If thevehicle is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer/retailer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15864101 B Second Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specific component,control, message, gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 9Manual Seats ................................................ 9Power Seat ................................................. 10Manual Lumbar ........................................... 10Heated Seats .............................................. 11Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 12Head Restraints .......................................... 15Seatback Latches ........................................ 16Easy Entry Seat .......................................... 18Power Lift Seat ........................................... 20

Rear Seats .................................................... 2060/40 Split Bench Seat

(Sedan and Coupe) ................................. 20Safety Belts .................................................. 22

Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 22Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 26How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 27Driver Position ............................................. 27

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment(Sedan Only) ........................................... 36

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 37Right Front Passenger Position ................... 37Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 38Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides

(Sedan and Coupe Only) ......................... 42Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 45Safety Belt Extender ................................... 45

Child Restraints ............................................ 46Older Children ............................................. 46Infants and Young Children ......................... 49Child Restraint Systems .............................. 53Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 58Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 61Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................... 71Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ......................... 73

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Airbag System .............................................. 78Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 81When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 85What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 87How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 87What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ........................................ 88

Passenger Sensing System ......................... 89Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 95Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 96Restraint System Check ............................... 97

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 97Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ........................................... 98

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

8

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

9

Power Seat

If the vehicle has apower seat, the controlused to operate it islocated on the outboardside of the driver’s seat.

To adjust the seat, do any of the following:

• Move the seat forward or rearward by slidingthe control forward or rearward.

• Raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion by moving the front of the control upor down.

• Raise or lower the rear part of the seatcushion by moving the rear of the control upor down.

Manual Lumbar

If your vehicle has this feature, the handle islocated on the outboard side of the driver’s seat.Move the handle up repeatedly to decrease lumbarsupport. Move the handle down repeatedly toincrease lumbar support.

2-door Model Shown, 4-door Model Similar

10

Heated SeatsYour vehicle may have heated front seats.

The buttons are locatedon the outboard side ofthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s seats.

Press the top of the switch to turn the featureon. The seat will heat to the high setting. Theindicator light above the switch will be lit next tothe number 2.

Press the top of the switch again to go to the lowheat setting. The indicator light will be lit nextto the number 1.

Press the bottom of the switch to turn thefeature off.

The heated seat feature will turn off when theignition is turned off.

11

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

12

Your seats have manual reclining seatbacks. Thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position. Release the lever tolock the seatback in place.

{CAUTION:


2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

4-door Model Shown, 2-door Model Similar

13

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

CAUTION: (Continued)

14


The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright. Thensit well back in the seat and wear yoursafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the top ofthe occupant’s head. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

15

Pull the restraint up toraise it. To lower thehead restraint, press thebutton, located on thetop of the seatback, andpush the restraint down.

The rear seat head restraints are also adjustable.

Seatback Latches

{CAUTION:


16

If your vehicle is a coupe or retractable hardtopmodel, it has a seatback latch as part of themanual recline lever. This feature provides easyaccess to the rear seats. To operate the seatbacklatch, pull up on the manual recline lever. Theseatback will automatically spring forward.To operate the latch from the rear seat, pull backon the top of the manual recline lever.

{CAUTION:


Lift the seatback up to return it to the uprightposition. Push and pull on the seatback to makesure it is locked.

17

Easy Entry Seat

{CAUTION:

If the easy entry right front seat is notlocked, it can move. In a sudden stop orcrash, the person sitting there could beinjured. After you have used it, be sure topush rearward on an easy entry seat to besure it is locked.

{CAUTION:


If your vehicle is a two-door model, the front seatscan be moved to make it easier to get in andout of the rear seat.

To use the easy entry seat, do the following:

1. Remove the safety belt from theheadrest-mounted guide.

18

2. Pull back on the top of the recliner lever. Theseatback will move forward.

3. Slide the seat forward.

4. Move the seatback to its original position afterthe passenger enters the rear seat area; thenreturn the front seat safety belt to thesafety belt guide.

5. Move the seat rearward until it locks intoplace. Make sure both the seat andseatback are locked.

19

Power Lift SeatYour vehicle may have this feature. First move theseat forward or rearward to where you want it.See Manual Seats on page 9.

The power lift seat switch is located on theoutboard side of the driver’s seat. To raise orlower the seat, press the top or bottom ofthe switch.

Rear Seats

60/40 Split Bench Seat(Sedan and Coupe)

Folding the SeatbackTo fold down the rear seatback, do the following:

1. The handles that are used to lower the rearseatbacks are located on the upper edge of thetrunk opening. Open the trunk. Pull the driver’sside handle to open the larger side of theseatback. Pull the passenger’s side handle toopen the smaller side of the seatback.

20

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Fold the seatback down from inside thevehicle.

{CAUTION:


{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

To return the seatback to the upright position,push up the seatback until you hear a click. Thenpull on the seatback to make sure it is secure.

21

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has indicators to remind you andyour passengers to buckle your safety belts. SeeSafety Belt Reminder Light on page 196 andPassenger Safety Belt Reminder Light onpage 196.

In most states and in all Canadian provinces, thelaw says to wear safety belts. Here is why:They work.

22

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

23

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

24

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

25

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

26

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safetybelts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 46 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 49. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

27

3. If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop or isa coupe, and the safety belt is not routedthrough the guide on the head restraint, slidethe edge of the belt webbing through theopening on the guide. Be sure the belt is nottwisted.

4. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

5. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.

28

6. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough, seeSafety Belt Extender on page 45.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

7. If your vehicle is a sedan, move the shoulderbelt height adjuster to the height that is rightfor you. Improper shoulder belt heightadjustment could reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See ShoulderBelt Height Adjustment (Sedan Only) onpage 36.

8. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.It may be necessary to pull stitching on thesafety belt through the latch plate to fullytighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.

29

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop orcrash.

30

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

31


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

32


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

33


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

34


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask yourdealer/retailer to fix it.

35

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment(Sedan Only)Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Incorrect positioningof the shoulder belt can reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt.

To move it down, pushdown the releasebutton (A) and move theheight adjuster to thedesired position. Youcan move the heightadjuster up by pushingthe release button up.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it without pushing therelease button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

36

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 27.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor the following.

If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt outall the way, you will engage the child restraintlocking feature. If this happens, just let the belt goback all the way and start again.

When the safety belt is not in use, slide the latchplate up the safety belt webbing. The latchplate should rest on the stitching on the safetybelt, near the guide loop.

37

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly.

1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.

38

3. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 45.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

4. To make the lap part tight, pull down on thebuckle end of the belt as you pull up on theshoulder part.

39

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. Ina crash, this applies force to the strong pelvicbones. And you would be less likely to slide underthe lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt wouldapply force at your abdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.

The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or acrash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

40

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop, securethe safety belt latch plate when the safety beltis not in use. To do this, slide the safety beltwebbing (D) behind the belt webbing retainingclip (B) and slide the latch (A) into the latchretaining clip (C).

41

Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides(Sedan and Coupe Only)Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provideadded safety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seats and for someadults. When installed on a shoulder belt, thecomfort guide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outboard passengerposition in the rear seat. Here is how to installa comfort guide and use the safety belt:

1. Pull the elastic cord out from between theedge of the seatback and the interior bodyto remove the guide from its storage clip.

42

2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. Theelastic cord must be under the belt. Then,place the guide over the belt, and insert thetwo edges of the belt into the slots of theguide.

3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it liesflat. The elastic cord must be under the beltand the guide on top.

43

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is not properly wornmay not provide the protection needed ina crash. The person wearing the beltcould be seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulder andacross the chest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take belt restrainingforces.

4. Buckle, position, and release the safety beltas described in Rear Seat Passengers onpage 38. Make sure that the shoulderbelt crosses the shoulder.

To remove and store the comfort guides, squeezethe belt edges together so that you can takethem out of the guides. Pull the guide upward toexpose its storage clip, and then slide theguide onto the clip. Turn the guide and clip inwardand slide them in between the seatback andthe interior body, leaving only the loop ofthe elastic cord exposed.

44

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for thedriver and right front passenger. Although youcannot see them, they are part of the safety beltassembly. They help tighten the safety belts duringthe early stages of a moderate to severe frontaland near frontal crash if the threshold conditionsfor pretensioner activation are met. And, ifyour vehicle has side impact airbags, safety beltpretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in aside crash.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 98.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, yourdealer/retailer will order you an extender. Whenyou go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you willwear, so the extender will be long enough foryou. To help avoid personal injury, do notlet someone else use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extender has beendesigned for adults. Never use it for securing childseats. To wear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see the instructionsheet that comes with the extender.

45

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder beltand get the additional restraint a shoulder beltcan provide. The shoulder belt should notcross the face or neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, just touching thetop of the thighs. It should never be worn overthe abdomen, which could cause severe oreven fatal internal injuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

46

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to awindow, move the child toward the center ofthe vehicle. Also see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides (Sedan and Coupe Only) onpage 42. If the child is sitting in the centerrear seat passenger position, move the childtoward the safety belt buckle. In eithercase, be sure that the shoulder belt still is onthe child’s shoulder, so that in a crash thechild’s upper body would have the restraintthat belts provide.

47

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

48

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

49

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

50

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants. Neither thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Youngchildren and infants need the protectionthat a child restraint system can provide.

51

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, the backand shoulders. Infants always should besecured in appropriate infant restraints.

52

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

53

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint withthe seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infant inplace and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

54

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured in thevehicle. With built-in or add-on child restraints,the child has to be secured within the childrestraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to be used ina vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.Then follow the instructions for the restraint.You may find these instructions on the restraintitself or in a booklet, or both.

55

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle. Makesure the child restraint is properlyinstalled in the vehicle using the vehicle’ssafety belt or LATCH system, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions inthis manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 61 for more information. A child canbe endangered in a crash if the child restraint isnot properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

56

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe child is properly secured, followingthe instructions that came with thatrestraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

57

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says, “Never put arear-facing child seat in the front.” This is becausethe risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if theairbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and noone can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


58


If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

If you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, review the following illustrations.Depending on where you place the child restraint,you may not be able to access certain safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchors for additionalpassengers or child restraints.

59

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints (Sedan Only)

A. Child restraint usingLATCH

B. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Occupant prohibitedB. Child restraint using

LATCH

A. Child restraint usingLATCH

B. Occupant prohibitedC. Child restraint

using safety belt orLATCH or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

A. Child restraint oroccupant usingsafety belt

B. Child restraint usingLATCH

60

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraint manufacturer willprovide you with instructions on how to usethe child restraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach a child restraintwith these attachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

61

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) ora dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether to theanchor.

Some child restraints that have a top tether aredesigned for use with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require the top tetheralways to be attached. In Canada, the law requiresthat forward-facing child restraints have a toptether, and that the tether be attached. Inthe United States, some child restraints also havea top tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

62

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.



Rear Seat — Sedan

Rear Seat — Coupe

Rear Seat — RetractableHardtop

63

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors has twolabels, near the creasebetween the seatbackand the seat cushion.

The top tether anchors are located on the rearseatback filler panel. Be sure to use an anchorlocated on the same side of the vehicle asthe seating position where the child restraint willbe placed.

Sedan

64

Retractable hardtop models do not have top tetheranchors in any seating position.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position in a coupe or sedan model orin any position if your vehicle has a retractablehardtop, if a national or local law requires that thetop tether be attached, or if the instructions thatcome with the child restraint say that the top tethermust be attached. There is no place to attachthe top tether in these positions.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 58for additional information.

Coupe

65

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold only onechild restraint. Attaching more than onechild restraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachment to comeloose or even break during a crash. Achild or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

66

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Secure any unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pull theshoulder belt all the way out of theretractor to set the lock, if your vehiclehas one, after the child restraint has beeninstalled. Be sure to follow theinstructions of the child restraintmanufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

Sedan ModelsIf you need to secure more than one child restraintin the rear seat, see Where to Put the Restrainton page 58. Depending on where you placethe child restraint, you may not be able to accesscertain safety belt assemblies or LATCHanchors for additional passengers or childrestraints.

You cannot secure three child restraints using theLATCH anchors in the rear seat at the sametime, but you can install two of them. If you wantto do this, install one LATCH child restraint inthe passenger-side position, and install the otherone either in the driver’s-side position or inthe center position.

67

Refer to the following illustration to learn whichanchors to use.

A. Passenger’s Side Rear Seat Lower AnchorsB. Center Rear Seat Lower AnchorsC. Driver’s Side Rear Seat Lower Anchors

Make sure to attach the child restraint at theproper anchor location.

This system is designed to make installation ofchild restraints easier. When using lower anchors,do not use the vehicle’s safety belts. Instead,use the vehicle’s anchors and child restraintattachments to secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicle anchor tosecure a top tether.

Sedan, Coupe and Retractable HardtopModels1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to

the lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

Sedan

68

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. If the position you are using has an

adjustable head restraint, raise it. SeeHead Restraints on page 15.

2.3. Route, attach, and tighten the top tetheraccording to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint and youare using a single tether,route the tether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

69

If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing a single tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If the position you areusing has a headrestraint and you areusing a dual tether,route the tether underthe head restraint and inbetween the headrestraint posts.

If the head restraint is adjustable, pull up onthe head restraint to access the top tetheranchors. If the head restraint is fixed,there should be a gap to route the strap underthe head restraint. Do not route the topstrap around the head restraint.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

70

Securing a Child Restraint in a RearSeat PositionIf your child restraint is equipped with the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH) on page 61.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

71

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

72

6. If your child restraint has a top tether, attachand tighten the top tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the instructions thatcame with the child restraint and to LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) onpage 61.


To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger. If your vehicle has a retractablehardtop, when the hardtop is down and the safetybelt is not in use, secure the safety belt latchplate. See Rear Seat Passengers on page 38.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passengerairbag. A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where toPut the Restraint on page 58.

In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensingsystem. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infantseat or a small child in a forward-facing childrestraint or booster seat is detected. SeePassenger Sensing System on page 89 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 198 formore information on this including importantsafety information.

73


{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag if thesystem detects a rear-facing childrestraint, no system is fail-safe, and no



one can guarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusual circumstance,even though it is turned off. Werecommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in the rear seat,even if the airbag is off.


74

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 61.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 61 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontalairbag. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 89. We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be secured in a rear seat, even if theairbag is off.1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before

securing the forward-facing child restraint. SeeManual Seats on page 9 or Power Seat onpage 10.

When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay lit whenyou start the vehicle. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 198.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.3. If your vehicle has retractable hardtop or is a

coupe, remove the safety belt from the guideon the head restraint by sliding the webbingthrough the opening on the guide. Do notsecure the child restraint with the safety beltrouted through the guide.

4. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

75

5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

6. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

76

7. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed theshoulder belt back into the retractor. If you areusing a forward-facing child restraint, you mayfind it helpful to use your knee to push down onthe child restraint as you tighten the belt. Youshould not be able to pull more of the belt fromthe retractor once the lock has been set.


If the airbag is off, the off indicator will be lit andstay lit when you start the vehicle.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the childrestraint from the vehicle and reinstall the childrestraint.

77

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to makesure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing thechild restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust theseat cushion if possible. Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer/retailer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and be readyto work for an adult or larger child passenger.

If your vehicle has a retractable hardtop or is acoupe, insert the safety belt into the guide on thehead restraint by sliding the webbing throughthe opening on the guide.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver andanother frontal airbag for the right front passenger.Your vehicle may also have a seat-mountedside impact airbag for the driver and for the rightfront passenger. Your vehicle may also haveroof-mounted side impact airbags. Roof-mountedside impact airbags are available for the driverand the passenger seated directly behindthe driver and for the right front passenger and thepassenger seated directly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG will appear onthe airbag covering on the side of the frontseatback closest to the door. If your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on theceiling near the side windows.

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

78

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt, even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting things insidethe vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts but do notreplace them.



Frontal airbags for the driver and rightfront passenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and near frontalcrashes. They are not designed to inflate inrollover, rear crashes, or in many sidecrashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed to inflatein moderate to severe crashes wheresomething hits the side of your vehicle.They are not designed to inflate in frontal,in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

79

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very close to,any airbag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulderbelts offer the best protection for adults,but not for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system norits airbag system is designed for them.Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint system canprovide. Always secure children properlyin your vehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 46 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 49.

80

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel cluster,which shows theairbag symbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 197 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

81

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver, it is in the side of the driver’sseatback closest to the door.

82

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger, it is in the sideof the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the person seated directlybehind the driver, it is in the ceiling above theside windows.

83

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and the personseated directly behind that passenger, it is inthe ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. If your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie-downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating airbag willbe blocked. Do not let seat covers blockthe inflation path of a side impact airbag.The path of an inflating airbag must bekept clear.

84

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on how fast your vehicleis traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, thedirection of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle has electronicfrontal sensors which helps the sensing systemdistinguish between a moderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, these airbags inflate at a level lessthan full deployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs. If the front of yourvehicle goes straight into a wall that does notmove or deform, the threshold level for thereduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold levelfor a full deployment is about 18 to 24 mph(29 to 38.5 km/h). The threshold level can vary,however, with specific vehicle design, so that it canbe somewhat above or below this range.

85

Frontal airbags may inflate at different crashspeeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)are not intended to inflate during vehiclerollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.

Your vehicle may or may not have side impactairbags. See Airbag System on page 78 for moreinformation. Side impact airbags are intendedto inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. Aside impact airbag will inflate if the crash severityis above the system’s designed threshold level.The threshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intendedto inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. A side impact airbag isintended to deploy on the side of the vehiclethat is struck.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits, the angleof the impact, and how quickly the vehicle slowsdown. For side impact airbags, inflation isdetermined by the location and severity of theimpact.

86

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontalairbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side window.

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

87

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags may stillbe at least partially inflated minutes after the vehiclecomes to rest. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag, the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest tothe door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped), and the garnish trim and the areaalong the ceiling of your vehicle near the sidewindows for the roof–mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) — may be hot for a short time. Theparts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust coming from the vents inthe deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out of the windshieldor being able to steer the vehicle, nor does itprevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off again by using the controls for thosefeatures.

88

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy on page 473 and Event DataRecorders on page 473.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer/retailer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system forthe right front passenger’s position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visible when you startyour vehicle in the instrument panel.

The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on andoff, will be visible during the system check. Ifyou are using remote start to start your vehiclefrom a distance, if equipped, you may not see thesystem check. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON or the word OFF, orthe symbol for on or the symbol for off, will bevisible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 198.

United States Canada

89

The passenger sensing system will turn off theright front passenger’s frontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver’s airbags are not part ofthe passenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing system works withsensors that are part of the right front passenger’sseat. The sensors are designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated occupant anddetermine if the passenger’s frontal airbag shouldbe enabled (may inflate) or not.

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than thefront seat.

We recommend that children be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a child riding in aforward-facing child seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who are large enough,using safety belts.


{CAUTION:




90



The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that an infant ispresent in a rear-facing infant seat.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied by asmaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit to remind you thatthe airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 198.

If a child restraint has been installed and the onindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 73.

91

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraintson page 15.

Remove any additional material from the seatcushion before reinstalling or securing thechild restraint.

If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle, and check with your dealer/retailer.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size is sitting properly in theright front passenger’s seat. When the passengersensing system has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture and body build.Everyone in your vehicle who has outgrownchild restraints should wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not there is an airbag forthat person.

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor two to three minutes. This will allow thesystem to detect that person and then enable theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

92

Safety belts help keep the passenger in positionon the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking,which helps the passenger sensing systemmaintain the passenger airbag status. See “SafetyBelts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index foradditional information about the importance ofproper restraint use.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that something maybe wrong with the airbag system. If thisever happens, have the vehicle servicedpromptly, because an adult-size personsitting in the right front passenger’s seatmay not have the protection of theairbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 197 for more on this, includingimportant safety information.

93

A thick layer of additional material, such as ablanket or cushion, or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, and seat massagerscan affect how well the passenger sensing systemoperates. You may want to consider not using seatcovers or other aftermarket equipment. See AddingEquipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 96 for more information about modificationsthat can affect how the system operates.

The passenger sensing system may suppress theairbag deployment when liquid soaks into theseat. If this happens, the off indicator in thepassenger airbag status indicator and the airbagreadiness light on the instrument panel will belit. The system should resume normal operationafter the seat is allowed to dry. If the systemoperates incorrectly after the seat has dried, haveyour dealer/retailer check the system.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

94

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 471.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

95

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 454.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbag sensing anddiagnostic module, steering wheel, instrumentpanel, ceiling headliner, ceiling and pillargarnish trim, roof-mounted airbag modules, orairbag wiring can affect the operation of theairbag system. If you have questions, callCustomer Assistance. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are in StepTwo of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure inthis manual. See Customer SatisfactionProcedure on page 454.

96

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors, and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. See Care of Safety Belts on page 411for more information.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced. Theairbag system does not need regular maintenance.

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe airbag covering on the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s seatback (if equipped), or theside impact airbag covering on the garnish trimand ceiling near the side windows (if equipped),the airbag may not work properly. You mayhave to replace the airbag module in thesteering wheel, both the airbag module andthe instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s airbag, the airbag module andseatback for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped), or the side impact airbag module,garnish trim and ceiling covering for theroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

97

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help make sureyour restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have them inspectedand any necessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash, thenyou need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during a moresevere crash, you may need new LATCH systemparts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 197.

98

Keys ............................................................ 101Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ........ 102Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System Operation .................................. 104Doors and Locks ........................................ 110

Door Locks ................................................ 110Power Door Locks ..................................... 111Door Ajar Reminder .................................. 111Delayed Locking ........................................ 111Automatic Door Lock ................................. 112Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ....... 112Rear Door Security Locks ......................... 113Lockout Protection ..................................... 113Trunk ........................................................ 114

Windows ...................................................... 116Power Windows ........................................ 117Sun Visors ................................................ 119

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 119Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 119PASS-Key® III+ ......................................... 121PASS-Key® III+ Operation ......................... 121

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 123New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 123Ignition Positions ....................................... 124Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ............. 125Starting the Engine .................................... 126Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 127Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 128Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 130Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 135Parking Brake ........................................... 137Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 138Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 140Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transaxle) .... 140Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 141Engine Exhaust ......................................... 142Running the Engine While Parked ............. 143

Section 2 Features and Controls

99

Mirrors ......................................................... 144Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 144Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 144Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with OnStar® and Compass ................... 145Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror

with Compass ........................................ 147Outside Power Mirrors ............................... 149Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 149

OnStar® System .......................................... 150

Storage Areas ............................................. 153Glove Box ................................................. 153Cupholder(s) .............................................. 153Center Console Storage Area .................... 153Convenience Net ....................................... 153

Sunroof ....................................................... 154Sunroof - Panoramic ................................. 155

Retractable Hardtop .................................... 157Lowering the Retractable Hardtop .............. 157Raising the Retractable Hardtop ................ 160

Section 2 Features and Controls

100

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with the keys inthe ignition and they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

101

One key is used for theignition and all locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered to the dealer/retailer, the key has a key tag. This tag has abar-coded key code that tells your dealer/retailerhow to make extra keys. This tag may be removedand kept by your dealer/retailer. If it has not beenremoved, keep the tag in a safe place. If you loseyour key, your dealer/retailer can easily makeanother one by using the key code. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 460 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

102

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 104.

• If you are still having trouble, see yourdealer/retailer or a qualified technicianfor service.

103

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationThe vehicle’s doors may be locked and unlocked,and the trunk can be opened from approximately3 feet (1 m) up to 197 feet (60 m) away withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. Ifyour vehicle has the remote vehicle start feature,you can also start the vehicle’s engine withthe RKE transmitter.

The following functions may be available if yourvehicle has the RKE system.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): If your vehicle hasthis feature, the engine may be started fromoutside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See“Remote Vehicle Start” later in this section formore detailed information.

Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all thedoors. The interior lamps will turn off after all of thedoors are closed. If enabled through the DriverInformation Center (DIC), the remote lock feedbackcan be programmed to have the horn chirpand/or the turn signals flash when the RKEtransmitter is used to lock the vehicle’s doors. See“LOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH” under DICVehicle Personalization on page 217 for moreinformation.

Pressing the lock button may also arm the contenttheft-deterrent system. See ContentTheft-Deterrent on page 119.

Remote Keyless Entrywith Remote Start

Remote Keyless Entrywithout Remote Start

104

K (Unlock): Press the unlock button to unlockthe driver’s door. If the button is pressed againwithin five seconds, all remaining doors will unlock.The interior lamps will turn on and stay on for20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on.If enabled through the DIC, the remote unlockfeedback can be programmed to have thehorn chirp and/or the turn signals flash when theRKE transmitter is used to unlock the vehicle’sdoors. See “UNLOCK HORN” and “LIGHT FLASH”under DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 217for more information.

If enabled through the DIC, and it is dark enoughoutside, the vehicle’s high-beam headlamps,parking lamps, and back-up lamps will turn oneach time the unlock button on the transmitter ispressed. These exterior lamps will stay on for20 seconds, or until a door is opened. See “EXT(Exterior) LIGHTS” under DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 217 for additionalinformation.

Pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitterwill disarm the content theft-deterrent system.See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 119.

V (Remote Trunk Release): Press and holdthis button for approximately one second toopen the trunk. The trunk will open using thetransmitter when the vehicle speed is lessthan 2 mph (3 km/h), when the ignition is off, orwhen the vehicle shift lever is in PARK (P), if yourvehicle has an automatic transaxle.

L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): This buttonmay be used to locate your vehicle. When youpress and release this button, the horn will soundthree times and the headlamps and turn signalswill flash three times. Press and hold the button forapproximately three seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn will sound and the headlamps andturn signals will flash for 30 seconds. Press thebutton again to cancel the panic alarm.

105

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach RKE transmitter is coded to prevent anothertransmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can bepurchased through your dealer. Remember tobring any additional transmitters so they can alsobe re-coded to match the new transmitter.Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter,the lost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle.Each vehicle can have up to four transmittersmatched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your RKEtransmitter should last about four years.

The battery is weak if the transmitter will not workat the normal range in any location. If you haveto get close to your vehicle before the transmitterworks, it is probably time to change the battery.

The KEY FOB BATT LOW message in thevehicle’s DIC will display if the RKE transmitterbattery is low.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

To replace the battery in the RKE transmitter dothe following:

1. Insert a flat object, with a thin edge, into thenotch located below the vehicle locator/panicalarm button, and separate the bottomhalf from the top half of the transmitter.

106

2. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive (+) side ofthe battery faces up. Use one three-volt,CR2032, or equivalent, type battery.

3. Snap the front and back together tightly somoisture will not get inside the transmitter.

4. Test the operation of the transmitter with thevehicle.

Remote Vehicle StartYour vehicle may have a remote starting feature.This feature allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle. It may also start thevehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems andrear window defogger. When the remote startsystem is active and the vehicle has an automaticclimate control system, it will automaticallyregulate the inside temperature. Normal operationof the system will return after the ignition key isturned to ON.

Laws in some communities may restrict the use ofremote starters. For example, some laws mayrequire a person using remote start to havethe vehicle in view when doing so. Check localregulations for any requirements on remote startingof vehicles.

Do not use the remote start feature if your vehicleis low on fuel. Your vehicle may run out of fuel.

The remote start feature provides two separatestarts per ignition cycle, each with 10 minutes ofengine running time.

The remote start feature needs to be reset afteryour vehicle’s engine is started two times using thetransmitter’s remote start button. To reset theremote start feature, insert the vehicle’s key intothe ignition switch and turn it to ON. SeeIgnition Positions on page 124 for informationregarding the ignition positions on your vehicle.

You can start your vehicle’s engine fromapproximately 197 feet (60 m) away. However, therange may be less while the vehicle is running,and as a result you may need to be closer to yourvehicle to turn it off than you were to turn it on.

There are other conditions which can affectthe performance of the transmitter, see RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System on page 102 foradditional information.

107

/ (Remote Start): If your vehicle has the remotestart feature, the RKE transmitter will have abutton with this symbol on it.

To start the vehicle using the remote start feature,do the following:

1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle.

2. Press and release the transmitter’s lockbutton, then immediately press and holdthe transmitter’s remote start button until thevehicle’s turn signal lamps flash.When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps willturn on and remain on while the engine isrunning.

3. If it is the first remote start since the vehiclehas been driven, repeat these steps, whilethe engine is still running, to extend the enginerunning time by 10 minutes. Remote startcan be extended one time.

After entering the vehicle during a remote start,insert and turn the key to ON to drive the vehicle.

The engine will shut off automatically after10 minutes, unless a time extension has beendone or the vehicle’s key is inserted into theignition switch and turned to ON.

To manually shut off a remote start, do any of thefollowing. The parking lamps will turn off toindicate the engine is off.

• Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle andpress and release the remote start button.

• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

• Turn the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

Your vehicle’s engine can be started two times, perignition cycle, using the transmitter’s remotestart feature.

If the remote start procedure is used again beforethe first 10 minute time frame has ended, thefirst 10 minutes will immediately expire andthe second 10 minute time frame will start.

108

The remote vehicle start feature will not operate ifany of the follow occur:

• The remote start system is disabled throughthe DIC.

• The vehicle’s key is in the ignition.

• The vehicle’s hood is open.

• The hazard warning flashers are on.

• The check engine light is on. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 205.

• The engine coolant temperature is too high.

• The oil pressure is low.

• Two remote vehicle starts have already beenused for that ignition cycle.

Vehicles that have the remote vehicle start featureare shipped from the factory with the remotestart system enabled. The system may be enabledor disabled through the DIC. See “REMOTESTART” under DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 217 for additional information.

Remote Start Ready (AutomaticTransaxle Only)If your vehicle does not have the remote vehiclestart feature, it may have the remote startready feature. This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer’s remote vehicle startfeature.

If the RKE transmitter has a plus (+) symbol onthe back cover, your vehicle has the remote startready feature. You can lock or unlock yourvehicle from approximately 197 feet (60 m) away.

See your dealer if you would like to add themanufacturer’s remote vehicle start feature toyour vehicle.

109

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.

• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuries



or even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or, if your vehiclehas one, the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. Turn the key counterclockwise tounlock the door. Turn the key clockwise to lockthe door.

From the inside, use the manual lock knobs or thepower lock switches.

110

Power Door LocksThe power door lock switches are located on thedriver’s and front passenger’s door.

Press the top of the switch to unlock all doors.Press the bottom of the switch to lock all doors.

The rear doors do not have power door lockswitches. Rear seat passengers must usethe manual lock knob on their doors.

Door Ajar ReminderIf one of the doors is not fully closed while theignition is on and the shift lever is moved out ofPARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the following will occur:

• A chime will sound.

• The DOOR AJAR message will displaythrough the Driver Information Center (DIC)until the door is closed. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 214.

Delayed LockingThis feature lets the driver to delay the locking ofthe vehicle. It will not operate with the key inthe ignition. See Lockout Protection on page 113.

Press the driver’s power door lock switch orthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter lockbutton once. With the key removed from theignition and the driver’s door open, the followingwill occur:

• Three chimes will sound to signal the delay.

• All doors will lock and the turn signals will flashonce five seconds after the last door has beenclosed.

• The horn will chirp if the horn chirp feature isenabled. See DIC Operation and Displays onpage 211.

If a door is opened before the five seconds hasended, the doors will not lock until five secondsafter all doors are closed.

If the power door lock switch or the transmitterlock button is pressed twice when leavingthe vehicle, the doors will lock immediately.

111

If the power door unlock switch or the transmitterunlock button is pressed, the doors will unlockimmediately and do not lock automatically after thedoors are closed.

This feature is turned on at the factory but may beturned off through the Driver Information Center(DIC). See DIC Vehicle Personalization onpage 217.

Automatic Door LockYour vehicle is programmed at the factory to lock alldoors automatically when the following are met:

• All doors are closed.

• The ignition is on.

• The shift lever is moved out of PARK (P) forvehicles with an automatic transaxle.

• The vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph(8 km/h) for vehicles with a manual transaxle.

This feature cannot be disabled.

If someone needs to exit the vehicle once thedoors are locked, have that person use the manuallock knob or power door unlock switch.

Programmable Automatic DoorUnlockIf you have a sedan with a manual transaxle, thedoors will automatically unlock when the ignitionis turned off.

If you have a vehicle with an automatic transaxle,it was programmed at the factory to unlockwhen the shift lever is moved to PARK (P).

You can change the settings of the programmableautomatic door unlock feature through theDriver Information Center (DIC). See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 217.

112

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle may have rear door security locks.These prevent passengers from opening therear doors from the inside.

The rear door securitylocks are located on theinside edge of eachrear door. Youmust open the reardoors to access them.The label depictinglock and unlockpositions is located nearthe lock.

To set the locks, do the following:

1. Insert the key into the security lock slot andturn it so the slot is in the horizontal position.

2. Close the door.

To open a rear door when the security lock is on,do the following:

1. Unlock the by lifting the rear door manuallock, the power door lock switch, or if thevehicle has one, by using the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter.

2. Open the door from the outside.

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.

2. Insert the key into the security lock slotand turn it so the slot is in the vertical position.

Lockout ProtectionThis feature prevents the driver’s door from beinglocked using the power door locks, if the key isleft in the ignition and a door is open.

Pressing the power door lock switch will lock allthe doors and then unlock the driver’s door.

Security Lock Labelshown

113

Pressing and holding the power door lock switchfor more than three seconds will override thisfeature.

If you remove the key from the ignition, or if youuse the manual door lock or the remote keylessentry transmitter, you could still lock your keyinside your vehicle. Always remember to take yourkey with you.

TrunkTo open the trunk from the outside, press andhold the trunk release button on the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You can also usethe key in the trunk lock, except on retractablehardtop models.

Use the pull cup to aid in closing the trunk.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with thetrunk lid open because carbon monoxide(CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Youcannot see or smell CO. It can causeunconsciousness and even death. If youmust drive with the trunk lid open or ifelectrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the trunk lid:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your heating or

cooling system to its highest speedand select the control setting that willforce outside air into your vehicle. SeeClimate Control System.

• If you have air outlets on or underthe instrument panel, open them allthe way.

See Engine Exhaust on page 142.

114

Remote Trunk Release

Press this buttonlocated on the driver’sdoor near the mappocket to openthe trunk.

You can open the trunk when the gear selector isin PARK (P).

Emergency Trunk Release Handle

Notice: Do not use the emergency trunkrelease handle as a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunk as itcould damage the handle. The emergencytrunk release handle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk, enablingthem to open the trunk from the inside.There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunkrelease handle located inside the trunk onthe trunk latch. This handle will glow followingexposure to light. Pull the release handle upto open the trunk from the inside.

115

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

116

Power Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome bythe extreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

When there are children in the rear seat usthe window lockout button to preventunintentional operation of the windows.

The power window switches for all the windowsare located on the driver’s door armrest. Eachpassenger door also has a power window switchfor its own window. Press the front of theswitch to the first position to lower the windowto the desired level. Pull the switch up to raisethe window.

Sedan Switches Coupe Switches

117

Window Indexing (Coupe andRetractable Hardtop)This feature automatically lowers the window asmall amount when the door is opened. Then,when the door is closed, the window willautomatically raise fully.

If the vehicle loses power or the window freezes,this feature may not work. From outside thevehicle, close the door and push the windowinward so that the glass goes under the molding.

Power Window Initialize (Coupe andRetractable Hardtop)After a power reconnect, such as batteryreplacement, the indexing feature will not functionuntil the system is initialized. This procedureneeds to be done for each individual window.Once power is restored, do the following:

1. Close the door.

2. Raise the window by pulling thepower window switch up.

3. Hold the window switch up for two secondsafter the window is closed. Release theswitch. Then hold the switch up again fortwo seconds.

4. Lower the window all the way down.Hold the switch down for two seconds.

5. Repeat the procedure for each window,including the rear quarter windows onretractable hardtop models, until allwindows are initialized.

Express-Down WindowThe express-down feature lowers the windowall the way without continuously pressingthe switch. The switch(es) is labeled AUTO.

On sedan and retractable hardtop models, thedriver’s window has the express-down feature.On coupe models, both the driver’s and frontpassenger’s window have the express-downfeature. The front passenger’s express-down isactivated by the driver’s side switch only. Press thefront of the switch all the way down and releaseit to express open the window.

To stop the window while it is lowering, pull thefront of the switch up briefly.

118

Window Lockout (Sedan Only)

o (Window Lockout): This button prevents therear passengers from using their windowswitches.

The window lockout button is located near thedriver’s power window switches. The driver can stilloperate all the windows and the front passengercan operate their own window with the lockout on.Press the right side of the switch to turn thelockout feature on. Press the left side to turn it off.The red part of the switch is visible when youhave returned to normal window operation.

Sun VisorsSwing down the visors to block glare. The visorscan be removed from the center mount and swungto the side. The visors also have extenders thatcan be pulled out for additional blockage.

Your vehicle may have lighted vanity mirrors onthe driver’s and passenger’s visors. Whenyou lift the cover, the light will turn on.

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-Deterrent

Your vehicle may havea content theft-deterrentalarm system.

Arming the SystemWith the ignition off, you can arm the system bypressing the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter lock button or the power door lockswitch while the driver’s door is open.

The system will arm thirty seconds after all thedoors are closed, or sixty seconds with anydoor open.

119

If you press the lock button on the transmitter asecond time while all the doors are closed, thesystem will arm immediately. The system will stillarm in sixty seconds if a door is open. When theopen door is closed, the system will arm.

The security light, located on the instrumentpanel cluster, comes on to indicate that arminghas been initiated. Once the system is armed, thesecurity light will flash once every three seconds.

If the security light is flashing twice per second,this means that a door is open.

If you do not want to arm the system, lock the carwith the lock levers on the doors.

Disarming the SystemYou can disarm the system by doing any one ofthe following:

• Press the RKE transmitter unlock button.

• Turn the ignition to ON to disarm the system.

• Turn the driver’s door key lock cylindercounterclockwise.

Once the system is disarmed, the security light willstop flashing.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedTo activate the system if it is armed:

• Open the driver’s door or trunk. This willcause a ten second pre-alarm chirp followedby a thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.

• Open any other door. This will immediatelycause a full alarm of horn and lights forthirty seconds.

• Open the hood. If the vehicle has the remotestart feature, it will activate the full alarm.

When an alarm event has finished, the system willre-arm itself automatically.

How to Turn Off the System AlarmTo turn off the system alarm, do one of thefollowing:

• Press the lock button on the RKE transmitter.The system will then re-arm itself.

• Press the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter. This will also disarm the system.

• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. Thiswill also disarm the system.

120

How to Detect a Tamper ConditionIf you hear three chirps when the unlock or lockbutton is pressed on the RKE transmitter, it meansthat the content theft security system alarm waspreviously triggered.

PASS-Key® III+The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radiofrequency subject to Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules and with IndustryCanada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:



Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequencytransponder in the key that matches a decoder inyour vehicle.

PASS-Key® III+ OperationYour vehicle has the PASS-Key® III+(Personalized Automotive Security System)theft-deterrent system. PASS-Key® III+ is apassive theft-deterrent system. This means you donot have to do anything special to arm or disarmthe system. It works when you insert or remove thekey from the ignition.

121

When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses thatsomeone is using the wrong key, it preventsthe vehicle from starting. Anyone using atrial-and-error method to start the vehicle will bediscouraged because of the high number ofelectrical key codes.

When trying to start the vehicle if the engine doesnot start and the SECURITY light comes on,the key may have a damaged transponder. Turnthe ignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, and the keyappears to be undamaged, try another ignitionkey. Also, check the fuse. See Fuses on page 419.If the engine still does not start with the otherkey, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicledoes start, the first key may be faulty. Seeyour dealer/retailer who can service thePASS-Key® III+ and have a new key made. In anemergency, contact Roadside Assistance.

It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to“learn” the transponder value of a new orreplacement key. Up to 10 additional keys may beprogrammed for the vehicle. The followingprocedure is for programming additional keys only.If all the currently programmed keys are lost ordo not operate, you must see your dealer/retaileror a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+to have keys made and programmed to thesystem.

See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who canservice PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank thatis cut exactly as the ignition key that operatesthe system.

To program the new key:

1. Verify that the new key has 1 stamped on it.

2. Insert the already programmed key in theignition and start the engine. If the enginewill not start, see your dealer/retailer forservice.

3. After the engine has started, turn the key toOFF, and remove the key.

122

4. Insert the key to be programmed and turnit to the ON position within five seconds ofremoving the original key.The SECURITY light will turn off once the keyhas been programmed.

5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keysare to be programmed.

If you are ever driving and the SECURITY lightcomes on and stays on, you may be able to restartyour engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key® III+system, however, is not working properly andmust be serviced by your dealer/retailer.Your vehicle is not protected by thePASS-Key® III+ system at this time.

If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key,see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith whocan service PASS-Key® III+ to have a newkey made.

Do not leave the key or device that disarms ordeactivates the theft deterrent system in thevehicle.

Starting and Operating YourVehicleNew Vehicle Break-InNotice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed,

fast or slow, for the first 500 miles(805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts.Do not exceed 5,000 engine rpm. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timethe new brake linings are not yet broken in.Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 306 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

123

Ignition PositionsWith the key in theignition switch, you canturn it to four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force the key from theignition switch could cause damage orbreak the key. Use the correct key and turn thekey only with your hand. Make sure the keyis in all the way. If none of this works,then your vehicle needs service.9 (OFF): This is the only position from whichyou can remove the key. For a vehicle withan automatic transaxle, the shift lever must be inPARK (P) with the ignition in OFF to removethe key. For a vehicle with a manual transaxle, theshift lever must be in REVERSE (R) to removethe key. A warning chime will sound if youopen the driver’s door while the ignition is off andthe key is in the ignition.

ACC (Accessory): This position unlocks thetransaxle. It also lets you use things like the radioand windshield wipers while the engine is notrunning. To use ACC, turn the key clockwise to thefirst position. Use this position if your vehiclemust be pushed or towed. See RecreationalVehicle Towing on page 302.

Never try to push-start your vehicle, unless it hasa manual transaxle.

R (ON): This position is where the key returnsto after you start the engine and release thekey. The ignition switch will stay in this positionwhile the engine is running. But even whilethe engine is not running, you can use ON tooperate your electrical accessories and to displaysome instrument panel warning lights. Use theON position for push-starting a vehicle witha manual transaxle.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ACC or ON position with the engine off.You may not be able to start your vehicle ifthe battery is allowed to drain for an extendedperiod of time.

124

/ (START): This position starts the engine.When the engine starts, release the key.The ignition switch will return to the ON positionfor normal driving.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Retained Accessory Power (RAP)These vehicle accessories can be used for up to10 minutes after the engine is turned off:

• Audio System

• Power Windows

• Heated Seats (if equipped)

• Sunroof (if equipped)

These features continue to work up to 10 minutesafter the ignition is turned to OFF.

The power windows, heated seats, and sunroofwill work until any door is opened.

The radio continues to work until the driver’s dooris opened.

All these features operate when the key is in theON or ACC.

125

Starting the EngineTo place the transaxle in the proper gear:

Automatic TransaxleMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shiftinto PARK (P) only when your vehicle isstopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in the NEUTRAL positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold the clutchpedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed will godown as your engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediately after starting it.Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricate allmoving parts.Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assistsin starting the engine and protectscomponents. If the ignition key is turned to theSTART position, and then released whenthe engine begins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a few seconds oruntil the vehicle starts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held in START formany seconds, cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent gear damage, this systemalso prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC or OFF position.

126

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or−18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and holding it there asyou hold the key in START for up to amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer/retailer. If you do not, your enginemight not perform properly. Any resultingdamage would not be covered by yourvehicle’s warranty.

Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal(Automatic Transaxle)If your vehicle has this feature, you can changethe position of the throttle and brake pedals.This feature is designed for shorter drivers, sincethe pedals cannot move farther away from thestandard position, but can move rearwardfor better pedal reach.

The vehicle must be in PARK (P) or have theignition off for this feature to operate. If the systemsenses unusually high resistance while thepedals are being adjusted, such as a driver’s footpushing the brake pedal, it is designed todisable the switch. Remove the obstruction and tryto adjust the pedals again.

127

The switch used toadjust the pedals islocated on the left sideof the instrumentpanel.

To use your adjustable throttle and brake pedalfeature, do the following:The adjustable pedal feature is meant to be usedwith the adjustable seat and adjustable steeringwheel controls to reach a safe and comfortableposition.

1. Adjust your seat to a comfortable positionwhere you can comfortably reach othercontrols such as the radio and climatecontrols.

2. Adjust the throttle and brake pedals to reacha comfortable and safe operating position.

3. Adjust the steering wheel to a safe operatingposition.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have this feature. In very coldweather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolantheater can provide easier starting and betterfuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually, thecoolant heater should be plugged in a minimumof four hours prior to starting your vehicle. Attemperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolantheater is not required. Your vehicle may alsohave an internal thermostat in the plug end of thecord. This will prevent operation of the enginecoolant heater when the temperature is at or above0°F (−18°C) as noted on the cord.

128

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. On the 2.4L L4 ECOTEC® engine,the engine coolant heater cord is located nearthe air cleaner box on the passenger’s sideof the engine compartment. On the 3.5L, 3.6Land 3.9L V6 engines, the engine coolantheater cord is located on the driver’sside around the battery box. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 324 for moreinformation on location.

3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

129

Automatic Transaxle Operation

Your automatic transaxle has a shift lever locatedon the console between the seats.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels.It is the best position to use when you startthe engine because your vehicle cannot moveeasily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.

Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 138. If you are pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 306.

SE Model GT and GTP Models

130

Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine. Your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle shift lock control system. Youhave to apply your regular brake first and thenpress the shift lever button before you canshift from PARK (P) while the ignition key is inON. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), easepressure on the shift lever and push the shift leverall the way into PARK (P) as you maintainbrake application. Press the shift lever button andthen move the shift lever into another gear.See Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 140 later in this section.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice, or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 294.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.Also, use NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle isbeing towed.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

131

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), pushyour accelerator pedal about halfway down.

• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, pushthe accelerator all the way down.You will shift down to the next gear and havemore power.

Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, see “Skidding”under Loss of Control on page 277.

Notice: If your vehicle seems to accelerateslowly or not shift gears when you go faster,and you continue to drive your vehicle thatway, you could damage the transaxle.Have your vehicle serviced right away. Youcan drive in LOW (L) when you are driving lessthan 35 mph (56 km/h) and DRIVE (D) forhigher speeds until then.

THIRD (3): This position, available on theSE model, is also used for normal driving.However, it reduces vehicle speed more thanDRIVE (D) without using your brakes. Hereare some times you might choose THIRD (3)instead of DRIVE (D):

• When driving on hilly, winding roads.

• When towing a trailer, so there is less shiftingbetween gears.

• When going down a steep hill.

LOW (L): This position, available on theSE model, reduces vehicle speed more thanTHIRD (3) without using your brakes. You can useLOW (L) on hills. It can help control your speedas you go down steep mountain roads, butthen you would also want to use your brakes offand on.

132

You can use LOW (L) on very steep hills, or indeep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inLOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into first gearuntil the vehicle is going slowly enough.

Notice: Driving in LOW (L) for more than25 miles (40 km) or at speeds over 55 mph(90 km/h) may damage the transaxle. Also,shifting into LOW (L) at speeds above 65 mph(105 km/h) can cause damage. Drive inTHIRD (3) or DRIVE (D) instead of LOW (L).

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle.If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

MANUAL MODE (M): This position, available onthe GT/GTP models, allows you to changegears similar to a manual transaxle. If your vehiclehas this feature, see Manual Shift Mode (MSM)following.

Manual Shift Mode (MSM) (AutomaticTransaxle)To use this feature, do the following:

1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) rearwardand then to the right into the MANUALMODE (M).While driving in manual shift mode, thetransaxle will remain in the driver gearselected. When coming to a stop in themanual position, the vehicle will automaticallyshift to FIRST (1) gear.

2. Press the shift level forward to upshift orrearward to downshift.

The odometer display on the instrument panelcluster will change from the vehicle’s mileage tothe letter M, for manual shift mode, and a numberindicating the requested gear range whenmoving the shift lever forward or rearward. SeeSpeedometer and Odometer on page 195 for moreinformation.

133

While using the MSM feature the vehicle will havefirmer shifting and sportier performance. Youcan use this for sport driving or when climbing hillsto stay in gear longer or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transaxle will only allow you to shift into gearsappropriate for the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (RPM):

• The transaxle will not automatically shift to thenext higher gear if the engine RPM is too high.

• The transaxle will not allow shifting to the nextlower gear if the engine RPM is too high.

If the vehicle does not respond to a gear change,or detects a problem with the transaxle, therange of gears may be reduced and theMalfunction Indicator Lamp will come on. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 205 for moreinformation.

SECOND (2)/THIRD (3) Gear StartFeature

Notice: If you attempt a third gear start whiletrailering or towing a heavy load, you willnotice reduced engine power. This couldoverheat and damage your transaxle. Do notattempt a third gear start while traileringor towing your vehicle.

If your vehicle has the 6-speed transaxle, whenaccelerating your vehicle from a stop in snowyand icy conditions, you may want to shift intoSECOND (2), or THIRD (3) gear. A higher gear,and light application of the gas pedal, may allowyou to gain more traction on slippery surfaces.

134

With the TAP-Shift feature, the vehicle canaccelerate from a stop in SECOND (2) orTHIRD (3).

1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) into theMANUAL MODE (M) position.

2. With the vehicle stopped, press the plus (+)paddle forward to select SECOND (2) orTHIRD (3) gear. The vehicle will startfrom a stop position in SECOND (2) orTHIRD (3) gear.

3. Once the vehicle is moving select the desireddrive gear.

Manual Transaxle Operation

This is your shift pattern.The clutch must be fullypressed in when shiftinga manual transaxle toensure the transaxle isfully in gear.

Here is how to operate your transaxle:

FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift intoFIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless that 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have cometo a complete stop and it is hard to shift intoFIRST (1), put the shift lever into NEUTRAL andlet up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedalback down. Then shift into FIRST (1).

135

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), and FIFTH (5) andSIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) andFIFTH (5) and SIXTH (6) the same way you dofor SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedalas you press the accelerator pedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to Neutral.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down theclutch pedal and lift up on the ring on the shift leverto shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutchpedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) whileyour vehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parkingbrake, for parking your vehicle.

Once the shift lever is in REVERSE (R), theignition can be turned to OFF and the keyremoved.

136

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, pull up on the parkingbrake handle. If the ignition is on, the brake systemwarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 200.

To release the parking brake:

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Pull the parking brake handle up until you canpress the release button.

3. Hold the release button in as you move thebrake handle all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake on canoverheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer and you are parking ona hill, see Towing a Trailer on page 306.GT and GTP Shown, SE Similar

137

Shifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 306.

Use the following procedure to shift into PARK (P):

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your rightfoot and set the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe lever all the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to OFF.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the ignition key inyour hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

138

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your automatic transaxlevehicle with the engine running, be sureyour vehicle is in PARK (P) and your parkingbrake is firmly set before you leave it. After youhave moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold theregular brake pedal down. Then, see if you canmove the shift lever away from PARK (P) withoutfirst pushing the button.If you can, it means that the shift lever was notfully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shiftyour automatic transaxle into PARK (P) properly,the weight of the vehicle may put too muchforce on the parking pawl in the transaxle. Youmay find it difficult to pull the shift lever outof PARK (P). This is called torque lock. To preventtorque lock, set the parking brake and then shiftinto PARK (P) properly before you leave thedriver’s seat. To find out how, see “Shifting IntoPark (P)” previously in the section.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

139

Shifting Out of Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle)The automatic transaxle shift lock control systemlocks the shift lever in PARK when the ignitionis in OFF. In addition, you have to fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift fromPARK (P) when the ignition is in ON. SeeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 130.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever and push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) as you maintain brakeapplication. Press the shift lever button and thenmove the shift lever into the desired gear.

Parking Your Vehicle (ManualTransaxle)Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutchpedal in, firmly apply the parking brake, andmove the shift lever into REVERSE (R). Once theshift lever has been placed in REVERSE (R)with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn theignition key to OFF, remove the key and releasethe clutch. See Manual Transaxle Operationon page 135.

140

Parking Over Things That Burn{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

141

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.



• Your vehicle was damaged whendriving over high points on the roador over road debris.

• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

142

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. Butif you ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 142.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 290.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the automatic transaxle shiftlever is not fully in PARK (P) with theparking brake firmly set. Your vehicle canroll. Do not leave your vehicle when theengine is running unless you have to. Ifyou have left the engine running, thevehicle can move suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure your vehiclewill not move, even when it is on fairlylevel ground, always set the parking brakeand move the automatic transaxle shiftlever to PARK (P), or the manual transaxleshift lever to NEUTRAL.

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. If you have an automatic transaxle,see Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 138.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 306.

143

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the rearview mirror so you can see clearlybehind your vehicle. Grip it in the center tomove it up or down and side to side. The day/nightcontrol, located at the bottom of the mirror,adjusts the mirror to reduce headlamp glare frombehind during evening or dark conditions.Move the control to the right for night conditions.Return it to the center for daytime use.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

Your vehicle may have a rearview mirror with theOnStar® system.

Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at thebottom of the mirror. See your dealer for moreinformation on the OnStar® system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. Also, see OnStar®

System on page 150 for more information aboutthe services OnStar® provides.

Mirror OperationThe manual mirror operation works the same asthe manual mirror described previously, withthe exception that the mirror has OnStar®.

144

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith OnStar® and CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass and OnStar®

controls. For more information about OnStar®, seeOnStar® System on page 150.

The automatic dimming feature turns on each timethe vehicle is started. To turn automatic dimmingoff or on, press the left button below the mirror. Agreen indicator light will be on when automaticdimming is on.

There are also three OnStar® buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See your dealer/retailerfor more information on the system and howto subscribe to OnStar®. See OnStar® System onpage 150 for more information about the serviceOnStar® provides.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C appearsin the compass window, the compass may need tobe reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

145

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

146

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirrorwith CompassYour vehicle may have an automatic dimmingrearview mirror with a compass. This featureenables the mirror to sense nighttime glare fromvehicle headlamps from behind and automaticallydim to reduce the glare to a safe level.

The automatic dimming feature turns on each timethe vehicle is started. Press the OFF buttononce and the green indicator light located to theleft of the button will go out indicating the feature isoff. To turn the feature back on, press andrelease the AUTO button and the green indicatorlight will come on.

Compass OperationPress the on/off button once to turn the compasson or off.

When the ignition and the compass feature areon, the compass will show two character boxes fora few seconds. After a few seconds, the mirrorwill display the current compass direction.

Compass CalibrationIf after a few seconds the display does not show acompass direction, (N for North for example),there may be a strong magnetic field interferingwith the compass. Such interference may becaused by a magnetic antenna mount, note padholder, or similar object. If the letter C appearsin the compass window, the compass may need tobe reset or calibrated.

The mirror can be calibrated by driving the vehiclein circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until thedisplay reads a direction.

147

Compass VarianceCompass variance is the difference betweenearth’s magnetic north and true geographic north.If the mirror is not adjusted for compassvariance, the compass could give false readings.

The mirror is set in zone eight upon leavingthe factory. It will be necessary to adjust thecompass to compensate for compass variance ifthe vehicle is driven outside zone eight. Undercertain circumstances, such as a long distance,cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust thecompass variance.

To adjust for compass variance, do the following:

1. Find your current location and variancezone number on the zone map that follows.

2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zonenumber appears on the display.

3. Once the zone number appears on thedisplay, press the on/off button quicklyuntil you reach the correct zone number.If C appears in the compass window,the compass may need calibration. See“Compass Calibration” listed previously.

148

Outside Power Mirrors

The controls for theoutside power mirrors,are located on thedriver’s door.

Move the selector switch located next to thecontrol pad to the left or right to choose either thedriver’s side or passenger’s side mirror. Toadjust a mirror, use the arrows located on thecontrol pad to move the mirror in the desireddirection. Adjust each outside mirror so that a littleof the vehicle and the area behind it can beseen while sitting in a comfortable driving position.Keep the selector switch in the center positionwhen not adjusting either outside mirror.

Both mirrors can manually be folded by pullingthem toward the vehicle. This feature maybe useful when going through a car wash or aconfined space. Push the mirrors away from thevehicle, to the normal position, before driving.

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat. It also makes things,like other vehicles, look farther away than theyreally are.

149

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You maycancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar® as provided below. A completeOnStar® Owners Guide and the OnStar® Terms

and Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles with OnStar®, the Safe & SoundPlan, or the Directions & Connections® Plan isincluded for one year from the date of purchase.You can extend this plan beyond the first year,or upgrade to the Directions & Connections® Plan.For more information, press the OnStar® buttonto speak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

150

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services• Roadside Assistance• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be used withOnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages. Hands-FreeCalling may also be linked to a Verizon Wirelessservice plan in the U.S. or a Bell Mobility serviceplan in Canada, depending on eligibility. To find outmore, refer to the OnStar® Owners Guide in thevehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com orwww.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar® advisorby pressing the OnStar® button or calling1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes toaccess location-based weather, local traffic reports,and stock quotes. By pressing the phone buttonand giving a few simple voice commands, you canbrowse through the various topics. See the OnStar®

Owners Guide for more information (Only availablein the continental U.S.).

151

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button thatcan be used to interact with OnStar® Hands-FreeCalling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 254 for more information.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional information

regarding the accident that your vehicle has beeninvolved in (e.g. the direction from which yourvehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisorfeature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling, yourvehicle also sends OnStar® your GPS location sothat we can provide you with location-basedservices.

OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service. Not allservices are available everywhere, particularly inremote or enclosed areas, or at all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.

152

Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by your dealer/retailer. If the lightappears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe OnStar® button to confirm that your OnStar®

equipment is active.

Storage Areas

Glove BoxTo open the glove box, lift up on the lever.

Cupholder(s)There are two cupholders in the front centerconsole of the vehicle and two in the rear of thecenter console. Pull down the door on the rear ofthe center console to use the rear seat cupholders.

Center Console Storage AreaThe center console has a separate storage area.To open the compartment, which is also thearmrest, pull up the latch release handle on thefront of the lid.

In the floor console is a power accessory outlet.See Accessory Power Outlet(s) on page 182for more information.

Convenience NetThe vehicle may have a convenience net locatedon the back wall or the sides of the trunk.

Put small loads, like grocery bags, behind the net.It can help keep them from falling over.

The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Storethose in the trunk as far forward as possible.

Unhook the net so that it will lie flat when not in use.

153

Sunroof

If your vehicle has asunroof, the switch islocated on the headlinerbetween the maplamps.

The sunroof will only operate while the ignition isin ON or in ACC, or if Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 125.

Press the back of the switch and release it toopen the sunroof to the vent position. From thevent position, press and release the back ofthe switch to express-open the sunroof. To stopthe sunroof from express opening, press the switchagain. If the sunshade is closed, it will openautomatically when the sunroof opens past thevented position.

A deflector will automatically raise when thesunroof is opened. The deflector will retract whenthe sunroof is closed.

To close the sunroof, press the front of the switchand hold it until the sunroof is closed. Thesunroof will stop if the switch is released. Closethe sunshade by hand.

The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened orclosed if the vehicle has an electrical failure.

Notice: If you force the sunshade forward ofthe sliding glass panel, damage will occurand the sunroof may not open or closeproperly. Always close the glass panel beforeclosing the sunshade.

154

Sunroof - PanoramicIf the vehicle has a panoramic sunroof, it has fourglass panels that tilt or stack upon each other,when the sunroof control is turned to the vent orone of three opened positions. There is a separatecontrol for the automatic sunshade.

The sunroof will only operate while the ignition isON or in ACC, or if Retained Accessory Power(RAP) is active. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 125.

The panoramic sunroof control is located on theheadliner. From the closed position, turn thecontrol clockwise to vent the sunroof or open it tothree different positions.

0 (Closed Position): Turn the control to thisposition to close the panoramic sunroof.

1 (Vent Position): Turn the control to thisposition to vent the panoramic sunroof. The frontglass panel of the sunroof will tilt forward andthe sunshade will automatically retract to the ventposition.

2 (First-Open Position): Turn the control to thisposition to open the panoramic sunroof abouta third of the way. The second glass panelwill retract and the fourth glass panel will stackabove the roof. The sunshade will automaticallyretract to this position.

3 (Second-Open Position): Turn the control tothis position to open the panoramic sunroof abouthalf-way. The second glass panel will retractand the third panel will stack in front of the fourthglass panel. The sunshade will automaticallyretract to this position.

155

4 (Full-Open Position): Turn the control to thisposition to completely open the panoramic sunroof.The second glass panel retracts and stacks infront of the third and fourth panels. The sunshadewill automatically retract to the full-open position.To lessen wind noise in this position, use theautomatic sunshade control and close thesunshade to the comfort stop position. See“Sunshade” following.

Anti-Pinch FeatureIf an object is in the path of the sunroof when it isclosing, the anti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof from closing at thepoint of obstruction. The sunroof will then reversedirection.

Sunshade

The automatic sunshadecontrol is located on theheadliner, betweenthe map lamp controls.

The sunshade can be independently opened orclosed while the panoramic sunroof is closed.To express-open or express-close the sunshade,press and release the control rearward orforward. The sunshade will retract to the full-openor closed position. To stop the movement ofthe sunshade, press the control a second time. Toclose the sunshade to a particular position,continue to press the control and release it whenthe desired position is reached.

Neither the panoramic sunroof nor the sunshadecan be opened or closed if the vehicle has anelectrical failure.

156

Retractable HardtopThe following procedures explain the properoperation of the retractable hardtop. Theretractable hardtop will not operate if the trunkcargo cover is not in place.

If the retractable hardtop is lowered or raisedmultiple times, the engine should be running whiledoing so to prevent drain on the vehicle’sbattery.

Lowering the Retractable Hardtop

Notice: Leaving the retractable hardtop downand exposing the interior of your vehicle tooutdoor conditions may cause damage. Alwaysclose the retractable hardtop if leaving yourvehicle outdoors.

Notice: Lowering the top if it is damp, wet, ordirty can cause stains, mildew, and damageto the inside of your vehicle. Dry off thetop before lowering it.

Notice: If you lower the retractable hardtop incold weather (32°F/0°C or lower), you maydamage top components. Do not lowerthe retractable hardtop in cold weather.1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the automatic transaxle intoPARK (P). The vehicle must be in PARK (P),and the engine must be running, or the ignitionturned to the ON position, to operate theretractable hardtop.

2. The trunk cargo cover must be fully closed,and the trunk must be closed before loweringthe hardtop.

157

3. Make sure that nothing or no one is on oraround the hardtop. Make sure there isnothing on top or in front of the cargo cover.

{CAUTION:

When the retractable hardtop is opened orclosed, people can be injured by the partsthat move: the hardtop and its mechanism,the trunk lid, and the side windows. Keeppeople away from these parts when you arelowering or raising the top.

{CAUTION:

If the retractable hardtop is not completelyopened or closed, the system will causethe retractable hardtop to slowly descendafter 3 minutes. You or others could beinjured. The retractable hardtop will



descend immediately if the ignition isturned to OFF during the opening orclosing of the retractable hardtop. Alwayscompletely open or close the retractablehardtop and do not shut off the ignitionduring the opening or closing of theretractable hardtop.

4. The hardtop switchis located on theheadliner betweenthe front readinglamps.

Press and hold the switch rearward to lower thehardtop. The switch must be pressed untilthe cycle is complete.

158

As the switch is being pressed the windows andtrunk lid will open. The hardtop will automaticallylower into the trunk, and the trunk lid will close andlatch. If the engine is on, a chime will soundwhen the hardtop has lowered completely. TheDriver Information Center (DIC) will displayTOP MOVE COMPLT to signal the procedure iscomplete. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 214 for more information.

After the hardtop has lowered completely,release the switch. If you continue to pressthe switch for about two seconds after thehardtop has completely lowered, the windowswill automatically close.

If pressure is released from the switch before thehardtop cycle is complete, the cycle will stop andthe Driver Information Center (DIC) will display theTOP NOT SECURE message. Always press andhold the switch until a chime sounds, if the engine ison, and the Driver Information Center (DIC)displays the TOP MOVE COMPLT to signal theprocedure is complete. See DIC Warnings andMessages on page 214 for more information.

The hardtop will not operate if the vehicle has anelectrical failure. If an electrical failure occurs,see your dealer for service.

If your vehicle has an electrical failure whileoperating the hardtop, and must be towed to adealer for service, your vehicle should be towed byflatbed with the vehicle facing backwards.Consult your dealer or professional towing serviceif you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 460.

159

Raising the Retractable Hardtop1. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Shift the automatic transaxle intoPARK (P). The vehicle must be in PARK (P),and the engine must be running, or theignition turned to the ON position, to operatethe retractable hardtop.

2. The trunk cargo cover must be fully closed,and the trunk must be closed before raisingthe hardtop.

3. Make sure nothing or no one is on or aroundthe hardtop. Make sure there is no cargo ontop of or in front of the trunk cargo cover.

{CAUTION:

When the retractable hardtop is opened orclosed, people can be injured by the partsthat move: the hardtop and its mechanism,the trunk lid, and the side windows. Keeppeople away from these parts when you arelowering or raising the top.

160

{CAUTION:

If the retractable hardtop is not completelyopened or closed, the system will causethe retractable hardtop to slowly descendafter 3 minutes. You or others could beinjured. The retractable hardtop willdescend immediately if the ignition isturned to OFF during the opening orclosing of the retractable hardtop. Alwayscompletely open or close the retractablehardtop and do not shut off the ignitionduring the opening or closing of theretractable hardtop.

4. The hardtop switchis located on theheadliner betweenthe front readinglamps.

Press and hold the switch forward to raise thehardtop. The switch must be pressed untilthe cycle is complete.

161

As the switch is being pressed the hardtop willraise from the trunk and move into place.The hardtop and trunk lid will close and latch.If the engine is on, a chime will sound whenthe hardtop has raised completely. The DriverInformation Center (DIC) will display the TOPMOVE COMPLT message to signal the procedureis complete. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 214 for more information.

After the hardtop has raised completely, releasethe switch. If you continue to press the switchfor about two seconds after the hardtop has raisedcompletely, the windows will automaticallyclose.

If pressure is released from the switch before thehardtop cycle is complete, the cycle will stopand the Driver Information Center (DIC) will displaythe TOP NOT SECURE message. Always pressand hold the switch until a chime sounds, ifthe engine is on, and the Driver Information Center(DIC) displays the TOP MOVE COMPLT tosignal the procedure is complete. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 214 for moreinformation.

The hardtop will not operate if the vehicle has anelectrical failure. If an electrical failure occurs,see your dealer for service.

If your vehicle has an electrical failure whileoperating the hardtop, and must be towed to adealer for service, your vehicle should be towed byflatbed with the vehicle facing backwards.Consult your dealer or professional towing serviceif you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.See Roadside Assistance Program on page 460.

162

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 166Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 168Other Warning Devices ............................. 169Horn .......................................................... 169Tilt Wheel .................................................. 169Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 170Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 170Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 171Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 171Windshield Wipers ..................................... 171Windshield Washer .................................... 173Cruise Control ........................................... 173Headlamps ................................................ 176Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 177Headlamps Off in PARK (P) ...................... 177Delayed Headlamps .................................. 177

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 178Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 178Fog Lamps ................................................ 179Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 180Courtesy Lamps ........................................ 180Dome Lamp .............................................. 180Entry/Exit Lighting ...................................... 180Parade Dimming ........................................ 181Overhead Console Reading Lamps ........... 181Trunk Lamp ............................................... 181Battery Run-Down Protection ..................... 181Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 182

Climate Controls ......................................... 183Climate Control System ............................. 183Automatic Climate Control System ............. 187Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 192

Section 3 Instrument Panel

163

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 193Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 194Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 195Trip Odometer ........................................... 195Tachometer ............................................... 195Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 196Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ....... 196Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 197Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 198Charging System Light .............................. 200Brake System Warning Light ..................... 200Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 201Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 202Traction Control System Active Light ......... 202Enhanced Traction System Warning Light ... 203

Enhanced Traction System Active Light ..... 203StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light ...................... 204StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 204Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 204Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 205Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 208Security Light ............................................ 209Cruise Control Light .................................. 209Highbeam On Light ................................... 209Fuel Gage ................................................. 210Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 210

Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 210DIC Operation and Displays ...................... 211DIC Warnings and Messages .................... 214DIC Vehicle Personalization ....................... 217


164

Audio System(s) ......................................... 220Setting the Time ........................................ 221Radio with CD (Base Level) ...................... 222Radio with CD (Upper Level) ..................... 228Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 238XM Radio Messages ................................. 252Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................. 254

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................. 254Radio Reception ........................................ 255Care of Your CDs ..................................... 256Care of the CD Player .............................. 256Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 256Backglass Antenna .................................... 256XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 257


165

Instrument Panel Overview

166

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Side Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 192.

B. Side Window Outlets. See Outlet Adjustmenton page 192.

C. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See TurnSignal/Multifunction Lever on page 170.

D. Cruise Controls (If Equipped). See CruiseControl on page 173.

E. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 194.

F. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped).See Audio Steering Wheel Controls onpage 254.

G. Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever. SeeWindshield Wipers on page 171 and WindshieldWasher on page 173.

H. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions onpage 124.

I. Center Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 192.

J. Hazard Warning Flashers Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 168.

K. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 220.

L. Adjustable Pedal Buttons (If Equipped). SeeAdjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 127.

M. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 180.

N. Fog Lamps (If Equipped). See Fog Lamps onpage 179.

O. Hood Release Handle. See Hood Release onpage 323.

P. Horn. See Horn on page 169.Q. Climate Control System. See Automatic

Climate Control System on page 187 or ClimateControl System on page 183.

R. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operationon page 130 or Manual Transaxle Operationon page 135.

167

S. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 182.

T. Traction Control System Button (If Equipped),Enhanced Traction System Button (IfEquipped), and/or StabiliTrak® (If Equipped).See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 268 or Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 270 and/or StabiliTrak® System onpage 271.

U. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 198.

V. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 153.

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

168

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can set them upat the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m)behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on the steeringwheel pad to sound the horn.

Tilt WheelA tilt and telescope wheel allows you to adjust thesteering wheel before you drive. Raise the steeringwheel to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you enter and exit the vehicle.

The lever that allows you to tilt and telescope thesteering wheel is located on the left side of thesteering column.

To tilt and telescope the wheel, pull down thelever. Then move the wheel up or down or backand forth to a comfortable driving position. Pull upthe lever to lock the wheel in place.

169

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The lever on the left side of the steering columnincludes the following:

• G Turn and Lane-Change Signals. SeeTurn and Lane-Change Signals on page 170.

• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer.See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 171.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 171.

• O Exterior Lamp Control. See Headlampson page 176.

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has two upward (for right) andtwo downward (for left) positions. These positionslet you signal a turn or a lane change.To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the leverreturns automatically to the normal position.

An arrow on theinstrument panelcluster flashes in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever returnsby itself when it is released.If the arrows flash rapidly or do not go on at all asyou signal a turn or lane change, a signal bulbcould be burned out and other drivers will not seeyour turn signal.Replace burned out bulbs to help avoid anaccident. Also, check the appropriate fuses. SeeFuses on page 419.

170

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerTo change the headlamps from low beam tohigh beam, push the turn signal/multifunction levertoward the front of the vehicle.

This light on theinstrument panelcluster comes on ifthe high beam lampsare turned on whilethe ignition is on.

To change the headlamps from high beam to lowbeam, pull the turn signal lever toward the rearof the vehicle.

Flash-to-PassThis feature lets you use your high-beamheadlamps to signal a driver in front of you thatyou want to pass.

To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction levertoward you until the high-beam headlampscome on, then release the lever to turn them off.

Windshield Wipers

Use this lever, located on the right side of thesteering wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position toturn off the windshield wipers.

& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Movethe lever to this position for intermittent or speedsensitive operation. The amount of delay timevaries between wiping cycles due to the delaysetting selected or the speed of the vehicle.

171

x (Delay): While the lever is in the intermittentposition, turn the intermittent adjust band withthis symbol on it up or down to select a shorter orlonger delay between wiping cycles. To the leftof the adjust band are bars, increasing in size frombottom to top, that indicate the frequency of thewipes. Smaller bars mean the wipers movement isless frequent. Larger bars mean the movementis more frequent.

6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to thefirst setting past intermittent, for steady wiping atlow speed.

1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to thesecond setting past intermittent, for wipingat a high speed.

8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down tothis position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it thereuntil the windshield wipers start; then let go.The windshield wipers stop after one wiping cycle.If additional wiping cycles are needed, hold thelever down longer.

Damaged wiper blades can prevent you fromseeing well enough to drive safely. Clear ice andsnow from the wiper blades before using themto prevent damage.

If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them. If your bladesdo become damaged, get new blades.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.A circuit breaker stops the motor until it cools.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. Ifthe motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clearaway the snow or ice, and then turn the wipersback on.

As an added safety feature, if the wipers are onfor more than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlampsturn on automatically. They turn off 15 secondsafter the wipers are turned off.

172

Windshield WasherTo wash the windshield, press the button at theend of the lever until the washers begin.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

When the button is released, the washers stop,but the wipers continue to wipe about three timesor resume the previous speed.

Cruise ControlIf your vehicle has cruise control, you can maintaina speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or morewithout keeping your foot on the accelerator. Thiscan really help on long trips. Cruise controldoes not work at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

173

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you do notwant to. You could be startled and evenlose control. Keep the cruise control switchoff until you want to use cruise control.

The cruise controlbuttons are located onthe steering wheel.

J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruisecontrol system on and off.

RES+ (Resume): Press this button to resume aset speed and to accelerate the speed.

SET− (Set): Press this button to set a speed andto decrease the speed.

CANCEL [: Press this button to cancelcruise control.To set a speed do the following:

1. Press the on/off symbol to turn cruise controlon. The indicator light on the button comes on.

2. Get to the speed you want.3. Press the SET− symbol and release it. The

cruise symbol displays in the instrumentpanel cluster to show the system is engaged.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.When the brakes are applied, the cruise controlshuts off.If the vehicle is in cruise control and the TractionControl System (TCS) or Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) begins to limit wheel spin, the cruisecontrol automatically disengages. See TractionControl System (TCS) on page 268 and EnhancedTraction System (ETS) on page 270. When roadconditions allow, the cruise control can beused again.

174

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose you set your cruise control at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brakes. Thisdisengages the cruise control. The cruise symbolin the instrument panel cluster also goes out,indicating cruise is no longer engaged. To returnto your previously set speed, you do not needto go through the set process again. Onceat a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,you can press the RES+ symbol briefly.

This takes the vehicle back up and maintains thepreviously chosen speed.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to go to a higher speed.

• If the cruise control system is alreadyengaged, press the RES+ symbol. Hold itthere until you get up to the speed desired andthen release the button.

• To increase your speed in very small amounts,press the RES+ symbol briefly and thenrelease it. Each time you do this, your vehiclewill go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlIf the cruise control system is already engaged,• Push and hold the SET− symbol until you

reach the lower speed desired, then release it.• To slow down in very small amounts, push the

SET− symbol briefly. Each time you do this, thevehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.When you take your foot off the pedal, yourvehicle will slow down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well your cruise control works on hillsdepends upon the vehicle speed, load, and thesteepness of the hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on the acceleratorpedal to maintain your vehicle’s speed. Whengoing downhill, you might have to brake or shift toa lower gear to keep your vehicle’s speeddown. Of course, applying the brakes ends cruisecontrol. Many drivers find this to be too muchtrouble and do not use cruise control on steep hills.

175

Ending Cruise ControlThere are three ways to disengage thecruise control:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal; when cruisecontrol disengages, the cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster goes out.

• Press the on/off button, this will turn off thecruise control system.

• Press the cancel button. When cruise controldisengages, the cruise symbol in theinstrument panel cluster goes out.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, your cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

Headlamps

The band on the lever on the outboard side of thesteering column operates the exterior lamps.

The exterior lamp control has the followingfour positions:

2 (Headlamps): Turn the band to this positionto turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, andtaillamps.

; (Parking Lamps): Turn the band to this positionto turn on the parking lamps and taillamps only.

176

AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): Turn theband to this position to automatically turn onthe Daytime Running Lamps during daytime, andthe headlamps, parking lamps, and taillampsat night.

P (Off/On): Turn the band to this position to turnon the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,this position only works when a vehicle is inthe PARK (P) position.

To turn on the Automatic Headlamp System, turnthe switch to off/on. To turn them off, turn theswitch to off/on again. This is a momentary controlswitch that springs back when released. TheAutomatic Headlamp System always turns on atthe beginning of an ignition cycle.

Headlamps on ReminderA reminder tone sounds when your headlamps orparking lamps are manually turned on, if thedriver’s door is open and your ignition is in theOFF or ACC position. To turn the tone off, turn theknob all the way counterclockwise. In theautomatic mode, the headlamps turn off once theignition key is in the OFF position.

Headlamps Off in PARK (P)This feature works when the ignition is ON and itis dark outside. To turn the headlamps offwhen it is dark outside but keep other exteriorlights on, turn the exterior lamp control tothe parking lamp position. In this position, theparking lamps, sidemarker lamps, taillamps,license plate lamps and instrument panel lightsare on, but the headlamps are off.

To turn on the headlamps along with the otherlamps when it is dark outside, turn the exteriorlamp control to the AUTO or headlamp position.

This feature will not work for Canadian vehicles.

Delayed HeadlampsThe delayed headlamps feature keeps theheadlamps on for 20 seconds after the key isturned to OFF, then the headlamps automaticallyturn off.

To override the 20 second delayed headlampfeature while it is active turn the turnsignal/multifunction lever up one position and thenback to AUTO.

177

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle during theday. DRL are helpful in many different drivingconditions, but they can be especially helpful in theshort periods after dawn and before sunset. Fullyfunctional DRL are required on all vehicles first soldin Canada. The vehicle has a light sensor on top ofthe instrument panel that controls the DRL. Makesure it is not covered, or the head lamps will be onwhen they are not needed.

The DRL system makes the low-beam headlampscome on at a reduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:

• The ignition is on.

• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.

• The exterior lamps control is in the parkinglamps only position (This applies only tovehicles that are first sold in Canada).

• The light sensor detects daytime light.

• The parking brake is released or the vehicle isnot in PARK.

When the DRL system is on, the taillamps,sidemarker lamps, parking lamps, and instrumentpanel lights are not on unless you turn theexterior lamps control to the parking lamp position.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamp system when they are needed.

Automatic Headlamp SystemWhen it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system turns on the headlamps at thenormal brightness along with other lamps suchas the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps, andthe instrument panel lights. The radio lightswill also be dim.

Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of theinstrument panel that controls the automaticheadlamp system. Make sure it is not covered orthe automatic headlamp system will be onwhen it is not needed.

There is a delay in the transition between thedaytime and nighttime operation of the DRLand the automatic headlamp systems so thatdriving under bridges or bright overheadstreet lights does not affect the system.

178

The DRL and automatic headlamp systems willonly be affected when the light sensor seesa change in lighting lasting longer than this delay.

If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, theautomatic headlamp system comes onimmediately. Once you leave the garage, it takesabout one minute for the automatic headlampsystem to change to DRL if it is light outside.During that delay, the instrument panel cluster maynot be as bright as usual. Make sure theinstrument panel brightness control is in the fullbright position. See “Instrument Panel BrightnessControl” under Instrument Panel Brightness onpage 180.

To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlampsystem off, turn the ignition on and set theexterior light switch to the off/on position. ForCanadian vehicles, the transaxle must stayin PARK (P) for this function.

As with any vehicle, you should turn on theregular headlamps when they are needed.

Fog Lamps

If your vehicle hasfog lamps, the foglamp button is locatedon the instrument panel,to the left of thesteering wheel.

The ignition must be on for the fog lamps to work.

Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. Anindicator light in the button will glow when the foglamps are on. Push the button again to turnthe fog lamps off.

The parking lamps automatically turn on and offwhen the fog lamps are turned on and off.

The fog lamps turn off while the high-beamheadlamps are turned on.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

179

Instrument Panel Brightness

The control for thisfeature is located onthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise tobrighten or dim the lights.

Courtesy LampsIf your vehicle has a retractable hardtop, it hascourtesy lamps in the rear passenger area of thevehicle. These lamps make it easier to seewhile entering and exiting the vehicle. These lampscome on when any door is opened and onlyturn off when all the doors are closed.

Dome LampYour vehicle might have a dome lamp without aswitch. If the dome lamp has a switch, thefollowing are the settings.

9 (Off): Move the lever to this position to turnthe lamp off, even when a door is open.

1 (Door): Move the lever to this position so thatthe lamp comes on when a door is opened.

+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turnthe dome lamp on.

Entry/Exit LightingThe lamps inside the vehicle come on when anydoor is opened. These lamps fade out about20 seconds after all of the doors have been closedor when the ignition is turned to ON. They alsogo on when you press the unlock symbol button orthe horn symbol on the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) system transmitter.

The lamps inside the vehicle stay on for about20 seconds after the key is removed fromthe ignition to provide light as you exit.

180

Parade DimmingThe instrument panel has an added feature calledparade mode. It automatically prohibits thedimming of the instrument panel displays duringthe daylight while the headlamps are on sothat you will still be able to see the displays.

Overhead Console Reading LampsThe vehicle may have reading lamps on theoverhead console. These lamps come on whenthe doors are opened if the lamp switch isnot in the OFF position. Press the side of eachlamp to turn them on and off, while the doorsare closed.

Overhead Ambient LightingThese lamps will automatically turn on and off ascontrolled by the light sensor located on top ofthe instrument panel.

Trunk LampThe trunk lamp comes on when the trunk is openand turns off when it is closed.

Battery Run-Down ProtectionYour vehicle has a battery run-down featuredesigned to protect the vehicle’s battery.

When any interior lamp (trunk, reading lamps,or dome lamp) is left on when the ignition is turnedoff, the battery run-down protection systemautomatically shuts the lamp off after 20 minutes.This prevents draining of the battery.

To reactivate the interior lamps, do one ofthe following:

• Open any door.

• Press any Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter button.

• Press the power door lock switch.

• Press the remote trunk release.

• Turn the lamp that was left on to off and thento on again.

181

Accessory Power Outlet(s)Accessory power outlets can be used to connectauxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellulartelephone or CB radio.

There are two accessory power outlets, located onthe center console below the climate controls. If thevehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS),one accessory power outlet is in the center storageconsole and the other is on the center consolebelow the climate controls.

To use an outlet, remove the protective cap.When not in use, always cover the outlet with theprotective cap. The accessory power outlet isoperational at all times.

Notice: If electrical devices are left pluggedinto a power outlet, the battery may draincausing your vehicle not to start or damage tothe battery. This would not be covered bythe warranty. Always unplug all electricaldevices when turning off your vehicle.

Certain electrical accessories are not compatiblewith the accessory power outlet and could result inblown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experiencea problem, see your dealer for additionalinformation on the accessory power outlet.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not use equipment exceedingmaximum amperage rating of 20 amperes.Check with your dealer/retailer before addingelectrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

182

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling, and ventilation for your vehicle. Ifyour vehicle has the remote start feature, theclimate control system functions as part ofthe remote start feature. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operation on page 104.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or decrease the fanspeed. The fan must be on to run the airconditioning compressor.

To change the air delivery settings, turn the rightknob to select one of the following:

H (Vent): Turn the knob to this mode to directair to the instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Turn the knob to this mode todirect half of the air to the instrument panel outlets,and the remaining air to the floor outlets. Someair may be directed toward the side windows.

6 (Floor): Turn the knob to this mode to directmost of the air to the floor outlets with someair directed to the side window outlets andwindshield.

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. When thismode is selected, air from outside the vehiclecirculates throughout your vehicle. An indicatorlight will comes on to let you know that it isactivated. The outside air mode can be used withall modes, but it cannot be used with therecirculation mode. Press this button again tocancel the recirculation mode.

183

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of thebutton to turn the recirculation mode on. Theair inside the vehicle is recirculated through theclimate control system and throughout the vehicle,not from outside. This mode is helpful whenyou are trying to limit odors from entering yourvehicle and for maximum air conditioningperformance in hot weather. An indicator lightabove the button will come on to let you knowthat it is activated. The indicator light will blinkthree times if you try to use recirculation in a modethat it can not be used in. Use this mode onlywhen it is needed for comfort, since windowfogging occurs if the air conditioning compressoris not engaged.

Press this button to cancel the outside air mode.When you switch to the defog or defrost modes thesystem automatically moves from recirculationto outside air. When the vehicle or fan is turned offand back on, the system automatically defaultsto outside air. Only use recirculation mode when itis needed for comfort, since window foggingcan occur.

Temperature Control: Turn the center knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increaseor decrease the temperature inside your vehicle.

When it is cold outside 0°F (−18°C) or lower,use the engine coolant heater, if the vehicle hasone, to quickly provide warmer air. An enginecoolant heater warms coolant that the engine usesto warm the inside of your vehicle. For moreinformation, see Engine Coolant Heater onpage 128.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning system on or off. An indicatorlight comes on to indicate that the air conditioningis activated.

The air conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so sometimes a small amountof water drips underneath the vehicle while it isidling or after the engine is turned off. This isnormal.

184

Maximum Air ConditioningOn hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for your vehicle to cool down.It also helps the system to operate more efficiently.

For quick cool down on hot days, do thefollowing:

1. Select the C vent mode.

2. Select the highest fan speed.

3. Select # air conditioning.

4. Select the ? recirculation mode.

5. Select the coolest temperature.

Using these settings together for long periods oftime can cause the air inside of your vehicleto become too dry. To prevent this fromhappening, after the air in your vehicle has cooled,turn the recirculation mode off.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, it willturn on using the last settings selected on theclimate control before the vehicle was turned off.

The fan and air delivery knobs can be used duringremote start. The buttons will not work until theignition is turned on by the key.

The climate control system changes back tomanual operation when the vehicle key is turnedto ON.

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climatecontrol system is used properly. There aretwo modes to choose from to clear fog or frostfrom your windshield. Use the defog mode to clearthe windows of fog or moisture and warm thepassengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fogor frost from the windshield more quickly.

Turn the right knob to select the defog ordefrost mode.

185

- (Defog): Turn the knob to this setting to directthe air between the windshield and the flooroutlets with a small amount directed to the sidewindows. This mode automatically turns offrecirculation. The air conditioning compressor runsunless the outside temperature is at or belowfreezing. The air conditioning compressor operatesalthough the indicator light is not on. The airconditioning indicator light turns off when defog isselected. If the air conditioning button is pressedwhile in defog mode, the indicator light turns on. Ifthe button is pressed again, the light turns off.The recirculation mode cannot be selected whilein the defog mode. Do not drive the vehicle until allthe windows are clear.

1 (Defrost): Turn the knob to this setting to directmost of the air to the windshield with some airdirected to the floor vents. In this mode, the systemautomatically forces outside air into the vehicle. Theair conditioning compressor runs unless the outsidetemperature is at or below freezing. The airconditioning compressor operates although theindicator light is not on. The air conditioning

indicator light turns off when defrost is selected. Ifthe air conditioning button is pressed while indefrost mode, the indicator light turns on. If thebutton is pressed again, the light turns off.Recirculation cannot be selected while in thedefrost mode.

To help clear the windshield quickly, do thefollowing:

1. Select the defrost mode.

2. Select the highest temperature.

3. Select the highest fan speed.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog or frost from the rear window.

< REAR: Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator lightcomes on to indicate that the rear windowdefogger is on. Be sure to clear as much snow aspossible from the rear window.

186

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger turns off about 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. If turned on again, the defoggeronly runs for about seven and one-half minutesbefore turning off. The defogger can also be turnedoff by pressing the button again or by turning offthe engine.

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window defoggerremains on once the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, therear defogger automatically turns on if it iscold outside. When the vehicle transitions out ofthe remote start mode, the rear defogger turns off.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 104.

Notice: Do not use anything sharp on theinside of the rear window. If you do, you couldcut or damage the warming grid, and therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not attach a temporary vehicle license,tape, a decal or anything similar to thedefogger grid.

Automatic Climate Control SystemIf your vehicle has this system, you canautomatically control the heating, cooling, andventilation in your vehicle.

Automatic Operation

AUTO (Automatic): Select AUTO on both the fanspeed control and the air delivery mode controlknobs to activate the automatic system. Automaticoperation controls the inside temperature andair delivery.

187

Use the steps below to place the climate controlsystem in automatic mode:

1. Turn the fan knob and the mode knobto AUTO.The display shows the current set temperature.When auto is selected, the air conditioningoperation and air inlet is automaticallycontrolled. The air conditioning compressorruns when the outside temperature is overabout 40°F (4°C). The air inlet is normally set tooutside air. If it is hot outside, the air inlet canautomatically switch to recirculate inside air tohelp quickly cool down your vehicle.

2. Set the temperature.To find your comfort setting, start with an initialtemperature setting and allow about 20 minutesfor the system to regulate. Press the up ordown arrow temperature buttons to adjust thetemperature setting as necessary. If youchoose the temperature setting of 60°F (15°C)the system remains at the maximum coolingsetting. If you choose the temperature settingof 90°F (32°C) the system remains at themaximum heat setting. Choosing eithermaximum setting will not cause the vehicle toheat or cool faster.

Be careful not to cover the sensor located onthe top of the instrument panel near thewindshield. This sensor regulates airtemperature based on sun load, and alsoturns on your headlamps.Also be careful not to cover the sensor grilleon the lower right side of the climatecontrol faceplate. This senses the insidevehicle temperature needed for properregulation.To avoid blowing cold air at start-up in coldweather, the system delays turning on the fanuntil warm air is available. The length of delaydepends on the engine coolant temperature.Turning the fan knob overrides this delay andchange the fan to a selected speed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, theclimate control display initially shows “AS” in placeof the temperature to indicate the remote starthas been activated. The remote start system turnson using the last temperature selected beforethe vehicle was last turned off.

For best performance, turn the fan and modeknobs to the AUTO position. The fan speed andair delivery modes will change to achieve the bestcomfort.

188

If the outside air temperature is below 45°F andthe air delivery mode knob is set to AUTO,the automatic climate control system starts in thedefrost mode to clear the window.

The automatic climate control changes back tomanual operation by turning the vehicle on withthe key.

Manual OperationYou can manually adjust the air delivery mode orfan speed.

9 (Off): Select this position on the fan knob toturn off the entire climate control system.Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directedto the floor. This direction can be changed bychanging the mode position. The temperature canalso be adjusted using either the up or downarrow temperature buttons.

9 (Fan): Turn the knob with the fan symbol tomanually adjust the fan speed.

H (Vent): Turn the knob to this position to directair to the instrument panel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Turn the knob to this position todirect half of the air to the instrument panel outlets,and the remaining air to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Turn the knob to this position to directmost of the air to the floor outlets with some airdirected to the side window outlets and windshield.

The right knob can also be used to select defogor defrost modes. See Defogging and Defrostinglater in this section.

: (Outside Air): Press the right side of thisbutton to turn the outside air mode on. Airfrom outside the vehicle circulates throughout yourvehicle. An indicator light will come on to let youknow that it is activated. The outside air mode canbe used with all modes, but it cannot be usedwith the recirculation mode. Press this button tocancel the recirculation mode.

189

? (Recirculation): Press the left side of thebutton to turn the recirculation mode on. Theair inside the vehicle is recirculated through theclimate control system and throughout the vehicle,not from outside. This mode is helpful whenyou are trying to limit odors from entering yourvehicle and for maximum air conditioningperformance in hot weather. An indicator lightabove the button will come on to let you know thatit is activated. It blinks three times if you try touse recirculation in a mode that it can not be usedin. Use this mode only when it is needed forcomfort, since window fogging occurs if the airconditioning compressor is not engaged.

Press this button to cancel the auto recirculationfeature. Each time the vehicle is started, thesystem reverts to the auto recirculation function.

If recirculation is selected while in defrost,defog, or floor, the light on the button flashesthree times and goes out to let you know this isnot allowed. This is to prevent window fogging.

When the weather is cool or damp, operating thesystem in recirculation for extended periods oftime can cause fogging of the vehicle’s windows.To clear the fog, select either defog or defrost.Make sure the air conditioning is on.

Temperature Control: Press the up and downarrows to increase or decrease the temperatureinside the vehicle.

# (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turnthe air conditioning compressor on and off. Alight above the button comes on while theair conditioning is on.

When air conditioning is selected or in AUTOmode, the system runs the air conditioningautomatically to cool and dehumidify the airentering the vehicle.

On hot days, open the windows long enough to lethot inside air escape. This reduces the time ittakes for your vehicle to cool down. Then keep thewindows closed for the air conditioner to workits best.

190

On cool, but sunny days while using manualoperation of the automatic system, use bi-level todeliver warm air to the floor and cooler air to theinstrument panel outlets. To warm or cool the air,press the temperature buttons to the desiredsetting.In AUTO mode the system cools and dehumidifiesthe air inside the vehicle. Also, the systemmaximizes its performance by using recirculationas necessary.

Heating: On cold days when using manualoperation of the automatic system, choose floormode to deliver air to the floor outlets. To warm orcool the air delivered, push the temperaturebuttons to the desired setting.

To use the automatic mode, turn the knob toAUTO and adjust the temperature by pressing thetemperature buttons.

The heater works best if the windows are closedwhile it is used.

Defogging and DefrostingUse either the defog or front defrost to clear fog orfrost from the windshield.

- (Defog): Turn the mode knob to this position toclear the windows of fog or moisture. This settingdelivers air to the floor and windshield outlets.

0 (Defrost): Turn the mode knob to this positionto defrost the windshield. The system automaticallycontrols the fan speed if AUTO mode is selected.If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) orwarmer, the air conditioning compressorautomatically runs to help dehumidify the air anddry the windshield. The air conditioning indicatorlight blinks three times if you try to turn offthe compressor while in this mode.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toremove fog from the rear window.

< (Rear): Press this button to turn the rearwindow defogger on or off. An indicator light abovethe button comes on to indicate that the rearwindow defogger is activated.

If driving below 50 mph (80 km/h), the rear windowdefogger turns off about 15 minutes after the buttonis pressed. If turned on again, the defogger will onlyrun for about seven and one-half minutes beforeturning off.

191

If your vehicle’s speed is maintained above50 mph (80 km/h), the rear window defoggerremains on once the button is pressed.

If your vehicle has the remote start feature, therear defogger automatically turns on if it iscold outside, but the indicator light does not comeon. When the vehicle transitions out of remotestart mode the rear defogger turns off.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentRotate the instrument panel outlets and move thelouvers on the outlets to change the directionand amount of airflow in your vehicle.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatcan block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors canadversely affect the performance of thesystem.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside ofyour vehicle more effectively.

• When an objectionable odor outside thevehicle is encountered, use the recirculationmode, with the temperature knob at acomfortable setting to prevent the odor fromentering the vehicle through the ventilationsystem. This can be helpful when drivingthrough a long tunnel with poor ventilation.However, extended usage of this mode in coldor cool weather can cause window fogging.

192

Warning Lights, Gages,and IndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gages onyour vehicle. The pictures help to locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal that somethingis wrong before it becomes serious enough tocause an expensive repair or replacement. Payingattention to the warning lights and gages could alsosave you or others from injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asthe details show on the next few pages, somewarning lights come on briefly when you start theengine just to let you know they are working. Ifyou are familiar with this section, you shouldnot be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Oftengages and warning lights work together to let youknow when there is a problem with your vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on as you are driving, or when one of thegages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do aboutit. Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting todo repairs can be costly and even dangerous.So please get to know your vehicle’s warning lightsand gages. They can be a big help.

193

Instrument Panel ClusterYour instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. Youwill know how fast you are going, how much fuel you have, and many other things you will need to drivesafely and economically.Your vehicle has this cluster or one very similar to it. It includes indicator warning lights and gages thatare explained on the following pages. Be sure to read about them.

United States 2.4L and 3.6L Engine shown, Canada, 3.5L and 3.9L Engine similar

194

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your speed inboth miles per hour (mph) and kilometers perhour (km/h).

The odometer shows how far your vehicle hasbeen driven, in either miles (used in the UnitedStates) or kilometers (used in Canada).

When in manual shift mode, the odometer willchange from the vehicle’s mileage to the letter M,for manual mode, and a number indicating therequested gear range when moving the shift leverforward or rearward. For more information seeAutomatic Transaxle Operation on page 130.

Your vehicle has a tamper resistant odometer.

Repair or replacement of your instrument panelcluster should only be performed by your dealer.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can display how far you havedriven since you last reset it.

For more information see DIC Operation andDisplays on page 211.

Tachometer

The tachometer showsyour engine speed inrevolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

2.4L and 3.6L Engineshown, 3.5L and

3.9L Engine similar

195

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso come on and stayon for several seconds,then it will flash forseveral more.

This chime and light is repeated if the driverremains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion.

If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder LightSeveral seconds after the key is turned to ON orSTART, a chime will sound for several seconds toremind the front passenger to buckle their safetybelt. This would only occur if the passenger airbagis enabled. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 89 for more information. The passengersafety belt light will also come on and stay on forseveral seconds, then it will flash for several more.

This chime and light isrepeated if thepassenger remainsunbuckled andthe vehicle is in motion.

If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neitherthe chime nor the light will come on.

196

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel, which shows the airbag symbol.The system checks the airbag’s electrical systemfor malfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system check includes theairbag sensors, the airbag modules, the wiring andthe diagnostic module. For more information on theairbag system, see Airbag System on page 78.

This light will come onwhen you start yourvehicle, and it will flashfor a few seconds.Then the light should goout. This means thesystem is ready.

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on afteryou start your vehicle, it means the airbagsystem may not be working properly. Theairbags in your vehicle may not inflate ina crash, or they could even inflate withouta crash. To help avoid injury to yourselfor others, have your vehicle serviced rightaway if the airbag readiness light stays onafter you start your vehicle.

If there is a problem with the airbag system inyour vehicle, the SERVICE AIR BAG message willappear on the DIC display. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 214 for more information.

197

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has the passenger sensing system.Your instrument panel has a passenger airbagstatus indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON or START,the passenger airbag status indicator will lightON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,for several seconds as a system check. Then,after several more seconds, the status indicatorwill light either ON or OFF, or either the onor off symbol to let you know the status of theright front passenger’s frontal airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on thepassenger airbag status indicator, it means thatthe right front passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled(may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbag. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint can beseriously injured or killed if the right frontpassenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.


198

{CAUTION:


If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on theairbag status indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system has turned off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag. See PassengerSensing System on page 89 for more on this,including important safety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbagreadiness light ever come on together, itmeans that something may be wrong withthe airbag system. If this ever happens,have the vehicle serviced promptly,because an adult-size person sitting in theright front passenger seat may not havethe protection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 197.

199

Charging System Light

The charging systemlight will come on brieflywhen you turn on theignition, but theengine is not running,as a check to show youit is working.

It should go out once the engine is running. If itstays on, or comes on while you are driving,you may have a problem with the charging system.It could indicate that you have problems with agenerator drive belt, or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with the light on,be certain to turn off all your accessories, suchas the radio and air conditioner.

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop the vehicle. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

This light should come on briefly when you turnthe ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then,have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you ifthere is a problem.


200

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. Make sure theparking brake is fully released. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or, the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Towing Your Vehicle onpage 302.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

Your vehicle may havethe Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS).

This light will come on when your engine isstarted and may stay on for several seconds.This is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to OFF. If thelight comes on when you are driving, stop as soonas possible and turn the ignition off. Then start theengine again to reset the system. If the light stillstays on, or comes on again while you are driving,your vehicle needs service. If the regular brakesystem warning light is not on, you still have brakes,but you do not have anti-lock brakes.

201

If the regular brake system warning light is also on,you do not have anti-lock brakes and there is aproblem with your regular brakes. See BrakeSystem Warning Light on page 200.

The ABS warning light will come on briefly whenyou turn the ignition key to ON. This is normal.If the light does not come on then, have it fixed soit will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

If the traction controlwarning light comes onand stays on, theremay be a problem withthe traction controlsystem.

See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 268for more information.

Traction Control SystemActive Light

This light will appearwhen the traction controlsystem is limiting wheelspin. You may feel orhear the systemworking, but this isnormal.

Slippery road conditions may exist if this lightappears, so adjust your driving accordingly. Thelight will stay on for a few seconds after thetraction control system stops limiting wheel spin.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 268for more information.

202

Enhanced Traction SystemWarning Light

If the enhanced tractioncontrol warning lightcomes on and stays on,there may be aproblem with theenhanced tractioncontrol system.

See Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 270 for more information.

Enhanced Traction SystemActive Light

This light will appearwhen the enhancedtraction control system islimiting wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal.

Slippery road conditions may exist if this lightappears, so adjust your driving accordingly. Thelight will stay on for a few seconds after theenhanced traction control system stops limitingwheel spin. See Enhanced Traction System (ETS)on page 270 for more information.

203

StabiliTrak® Not Ready LightIf your vehicle has theStabiliTrak® system, thislight will come on ifthere is a problemdetected with theStabiliTrak® system.

This light will also come on when the StabiliTrak®

system has been turned off.

For more information, see StabiliTrak® System onpage 271.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

If your vehicle has theStabiliTrak® system, thislight will come onwhen the StabiliTrak®

system is activated.

For more information, see StabiliTrak® System onpage 271.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area,the light comes on and you hear a chime, theengine is too hot! It means that your enginecoolant has overheated. See Engine Overheatingon page 347.


204

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has acomputer whichmonitors operation ofthe fuel, ignition,and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intendedto assure that emissions are at acceptablelevels for the life of the vehicle, helping to producea cleaner environment. The check engine lightcomes on to indicate that there is a problem andservice is required. Malfunctions often will beindicated by the system before any problem isapparent. This may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle. This system is also designed toassist your service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other than those of the sameTire Performance Criteria (TPC) can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 316.

205

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired. This light will alsocome on during a malfunction in one of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou may be able to correct the emission systemmalfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 320.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. Aloose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

206

Did you just drive through a deep puddleof water?If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.Have you recently changed brands of fuel?If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 318. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if thecheck engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection ifthe OBD (on-board diagnostic) system determinesthat critical emission control systems have notbeen completely diagnosed by the system.The vehicle would be considered not ready forinspection. This can happen if you have recentlyreplaced your battery or if your battery hasrun down. The diagnostic system is designed toevaluate critical emission control systemsduring normal driving. This may take several daysof routine driving. If you have done this andyour vehicle still does not pass the inspection forlack of OBD system readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle for inspection.

207

Oil Pressure Light

If you have a low engineoil pressure problem,this light will stay on afteryou start your engine, orcome on when you aredriving.

This indicates that your engine is not receivingenough oil.

The engine could be low on oil, or could havesome other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations:

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light will come on as a test toshow you it is working, but the light will go outwhen you turn the ignition to START. If itdoes not come on with the ignition on,you may have a problem with the fuse or bulb.Have it fixed right away.

• If the vehicle is idling at a stop sign, the lightmay blink on and then off.

• If you make a hard stop, the light may comeon for a moment. This is normal.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or others couldbe burned. Check your oil as soon aspossible and have your vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

208

Security Light

For informationregarding this light, seeTheft-DeterrentSystems on page 119.

Cruise Control Light

This light comes onwhenever you set thecruise control.

The light goes out when the cruise control isturned off. See Cruise Control on page 173 formore information.

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 171 for more information.

209

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage tells you about how much fuel youhave left, when the ignition is on. See LowFuel Warning Light on page 210 for moreinformation.

Low Fuel Warning LightThis light, on the fuel gage, comes on when thefuel tank is low on fuel. To turn if off, add fuelto the fuel tank.

Driver Information Center (DIC)The Driver Information Center (DIC) providesthe following:

• A way to personalize your vehicle

• Trip information

• Warning messages

The buttons used to activate the DIC are locatedon the left side of the vehicle’s audio system.

INFO/4 (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displays.



210

MENU: Press this button to enter and scrollthrough the menu mode.

ENTER/r (Enter): Press this button to select amenu option or to acknowledge a warningmessage.

The DIC messages will be read through youraudio system display.

DIC Operation and DisplaysThe DIC comes on when the ignition is ON. If yourvehicle has the uplevel audio system, the timeand outside temperature is shown on the first lineof the display and the DIC information is shownon the second line of the display.

The DIC has different modes which can beaccessed by pressing the DIC buttons. The buttonfunctions are detailed in the following section.

Information Mode

INFO/4 (Information): Press this button to scrollthrough the vehicle information mode displaysin the following order:

• TRIP A

• TRIP B

• FUEL RANGE (Fuel Range Until Empty)

• ECON (Average Fuel Economy)

• AV SPEED (Average Vehicle Speed)

• OIL LIFE (Engine Oil Life System)

TRIP A or TRIP B: Press the information buttonuntil TRIP A or TRIP B is displayed. Thisshows the current distance traveled since the lastreset for each trip odometer in either miles (mi)or kilometers (km). Both odometers can be used atthe same time. Each trip odometer can be resetto zero separately by pressing and holdingthe enter button for a few seconds while thedesired trip odometer is displayed.

211

FUEL RANGE: Press the information button untilFUEL RANGE is displayed. This shows theremaining distance you can drive without refueling.It is based on fuel economy and the fuelremaining in the tank.

When the fuel level is low, FUEL RANGE LOWdisplays.

The fuel economy data used to determine fuelrange is an average of recent driving conditions.As your driving conditions change, this data isgradually updated. Fuel range cannot be reset.

ECON (Economy): Press the information buttonuntil ECON is displayed. Average fuel economyis how many miles per gallon (mpg) or litersper 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle isgetting based on current and past drivingconditions.

Press and hold the enter button while ECON isdisplayed to reset the average fuel economy.Average fuel economy will then be calculatedstarting from that point. If the average fueleconomy is not reset, it will be continually updatedeach time you drive.

AV (Average) SPEED: Press the informationbutton until AV SPEED is displayed. Thisshows the vehicle’s average speed in miles perhour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h).

Press and hold the enter button while AV SPEEDis displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.

OIL LIFE: Press the information button untilOIL LIFE is displayed. The engine oil life systemshows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life.It shows 100% when the system is reset afteran oil change. It will alert you to change the oil ona schedule consistent with your driving conditions.

Always reset the engine oil life system after anoil change. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 334.

In addition to the engine oil life system monitoringthe oil life, additional maintenance isrecommended in the Maintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Scheduled Maintenance onpage 434 and Engine Oil on page 331.

212

Personalization

MENU: Press this button while the ignition is ON toscroll through each of the personalization options inthe following order. To avoid excessive drain on thebattery, it is recommended that the headlamps areturned off. If the vehicle is moving faster than 2 mph(3 km/h), the personalization menu options are notavailable, except for the UNITS option. All of thepersonalization options may not be available onyour vehicle. Only the options available display onthe DIC.

• Oil Life Reset

• Units Selection (English/Metric)

• Remote Start Capability

• Horn Chirp During Remote Keyless EntryLocking

• Horn Chirp During Remote Keyless EntryUnlocking

• Exterior Light Flash During Remote KeylessEntry Locking or Unlocking

• Delayed Locking

• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: Specific Doors

• Automatic Vehicle Unlocking: When Key is Offor When Shift To Park

• Exterior Perimeter Lighting During RemoteKeyless Entry Unlock

• Select Language: (English, French, Spanish orGerman)

When the desired option is reached, press theenter button to toggle between the modes of thatoption. To make a selection, press the MENUbutton again.

If no selection is made within 10 seconds, thedisplay reverts back to the previous informationdisplayed.

The MENU mode is exited when the informationbutton is pressed, a 10 second time periodhas elapsed, the ignition is turned to OFF, or theend of the MENU list is reached.

See DIC Vehicle Personalization on page 217 formore information on the personalization options.

213

Enter

ENTER/r (Enter): Press this button to resetcertain functions and to turn off or acknowledgemessages on the DIC display. This buttonalso toggles through the options available in eachpersonalization menu.

DIC Warnings and MessagesThese messages appear if there is a problemdetected in one of your vehicle’s systems.

A message will clear when that condition is nolonger present on the vehicle. To acknowledge amessage and clear it from the display, pressany of the three DIC buttons. If the condition isstill present, the warning message will come backon the next time the vehicle is turned off andback on. With most messages, a warning chimesounds when the message displays. Yourvehicle may have other warning messages.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS OFF: This messagedisplays if the automatic headlamp system isdisabled with the headlamp switch.

AUTO (Automatic) LIGHTS ON: This messagedisplays if the automatic headlamp system isenabled with the headlamp switch.

BRAKE FLUID: This message displays, while theignition is on, when the brake fluid level is low.The brake system warning light on the instrumentpanel cluster also comes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 200 for more information.Have the brake system serviced by yourdealer/retailer as soon as possible.

CHANGE OIL SOON: This message displayswhen the life of the engine oil has expired and itshould be changed.

When this message is acknowledged and clearedfrom the display, the engine oil life system must stillbe reset separately. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 334, Engine Oil on page 331, and ScheduledMaintenance on page 434 for more information.

214

CHECK CARGO TOP: If your vehicle has aretractable hardtop, this message displays if thecargo divider is not in place when operatingthe retractable hardtop. Open the trunk and makesure the cargo divider is secure and no objectsare on the divider. See Trunk on page 114,Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 157,and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 160for more information.

CHECK GAS CAP: This message displays if thefuel cap has not been fully tightened. Recheckthe fuel cap to make sure that it is on properly. Afew driving trips with the cap properly installedshould turn the message off.

DOOR AJAR: This message displays if one ormore of the vehicle’s doors are not closed properly.Make sure that the door(s) are closed completely.

ENGINE DISABLED: This message displays if thestarting of the engine is disabled. Have yourvehicle serviced by your dealer/retailerimmediately.

ENG (Engine) PWR (Power) REDUCED: Thismessage displays to inform you that the vehiclehas reduced engine power to avoid damaging the

engine. Reduced engine power can affect thevehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on,but there is no reduction in performance, proceedto your destination. The performance may bereduced the next time the vehicle is driven. Thevehicle may be driven at a reduced speedwhile this message is on, but acceleration andspeed may be reduced. Anytime this messagestays on, the vehicle should be taken to yourdealer/retailer for service as soon as possible.

ICE POSSIBLE: This message displays when theoutside air temperature is cold enough to createicy road conditions. Adjust your driving accordingly.

KEY FOB BATT (Battery) LOW: This messagedisplays if the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter battery is low. Replace the battery inthe transmitter. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 104.

LOW FUEL: This message displays along with alow fuel warning light on the instrument panelcluster when your vehicle is low on fuel. Refill thefuel tank as soon as possible. See Low FuelWarning Light on page 210, Fuel on page 318,and Filling the Tank on page 320.

215

LOW OIL LEVEL: This message may display onsome vehicles. For correct operation of the low oilsensing system, your vehicle should be on a levelsurface. A false LOW OIL LEVEL message mayappear if the vehicle is parked on a grade. The oillevel sensing system does not check for actual oillevel if the engine has been off for a short period oftime. The oil level is never checked while theengine is running. If the LOW OIL LEVEL messageappears, and your vehicle has been parked on levelground with the engine off for at least 30 minutes,the oil level should be checked by looking at the oildipstick. Prior to checking the oil level, be sure theengine has been off for a few minutes and yourvehicle is on a level surface. Then check thedipstick and add oil if necessary. See Engine Oil onpage 331.

LOW WASHER FLUID: This message displayswhen the vehicle’s windshield washer fluid islow. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir tothe proper level as soon as possible. SeeWindshield Washer Fluid on page 355.

PARKING BRAKE: This message displays if theparking brake is left engaged and you try todrive away. See Parking Brake on page 137 formore information.

POWER STEERING: This message displays if aproblem has been detected with the electricpower steering, if your vehicle has this feature.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailerimmediately.

SERVICE AIR BAG: This message displays ifthere is a problem with the airbag system.Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailerimmediately.

TOP INOP (Inoperative) – TRUNK: If yourvehicle has a retractable hardtop, this messagedisplays if the trunk lid is not completely closedwhen operating the retractable hardtop. Make surethat the trunk lid is closed when operating theretractable hardtop. See Trunk on page 114,Lowering the Retractable Hardtop on page 157,and Raising the Retractable Hardtop on page 160for more information.

TOP MOVE COMPLT (Complete): If your vehiclehas a retractable hardtop, this message displayswhen the retractable hardtop has lowered or raisedcompletely. See Lowering the RetractableHardtop on page 157 and Raising the RetractableHardtop on page 160 for more information.

216

TOP NOT ALLOWED: If your vehicle has aretractable hardtop, this message displays if theretractable hardtop button is pressed whilethe vehicle is not in PARK (P). Make sure that thevehicle is in PARK (P) when operating theretractable hardtop. See Lowering the RetractableHardtop on page 157 and Raising the RetractableHardtop on page 160 for more information.

TOP NOT SECURE: If your vehicle has aretractable hardtop, this message displays whenthe retractable hardtop button is releasedbefore the top open or close operation is complete.Press and hold the retractable hardtop button tofully open or close the top. See Lowering theRetractable Hardtop on page 157 and Raising theRetractable Hardtop on page 160 for moreinformation.

TOP OVER TEMP (Temperature): If your vehiclehas a retractable hardtop, this message displayswhen the retractable hardtop button is pressed andthe hardtop pump motor temperature is too hot.Wait for the hardtop pump motor to cool downbefore using the retractable hardtop. See Loweringthe Retractable Hardtop on page 157 andRaising the Retractable Hardtop on page 160 formore information.

TOP TOO COLD: If your vehicle has a retractablehardtop, this message displays when theretractable hardtop button is pressed and thehardtop pump motor temperature is too cold. Waitfor the hardtop pump motor to warm up beforeusing the retractable hardtop. See Loweringthe Retractable Hardtop on page 157 and Raisingthe Retractable Hardtop on page 160 for moreinformation.

TRUNK AJAR: This message displays when thetrunk is not closed completely. Make sure thatthe trunk is closed completely. See Trunkon page 114 for more information.

DIC Vehicle PersonalizationThe following personalization options may appearon your vehicle’s audio display by pressing theMENU button:

OIL LIFE RESET: When this option is displayed,you can reset the engine oil life system. Toreset the system, see Engine Oil Life Systemon page 334.

217

UNITS: When UNITS appears on the display,press the enter button to move between METRIC orENGLISH. When you have made your choice,press the MENU button to record your selection.The initial setting from the factory is English for theUnited States and metric for Canada.

If you choose English, all information will bedisplayed in English units.

If you choose metric, all information will bedisplayed in metric units.

The unit measurement will also change the tripodometer, temperature, and average fuel economydisplays.

REMOTE START: If your vehicle has this feature,the remote start option can be enabled ordisabled. When REMOTE START appears on thedisplay, press the enter button to move betweenOFF and ON. When you have made yourchoice, press the MENU button to record yourselection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.

LOCK HORN: If your vehicle has Remote KeylessEntry (RKE), this option which allows the vehicle’shorn to chirp every time the lock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled or disabled.

When LOCK HORN appears on the display, pressthe enter button to move between ON and OFF.When you have made your choice, press the MENUbutton to record your selection. The initial settingfrom the factory is OFF.

UNLOCK HORN: If your vehicle has RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), this option which allows thevehicle’s horn to chirp every time the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter is pressed, can beenabled or disabled. When UNLOCK HORNappears on the display, press the enter button tomove between ON and OFF. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU buttonto record your selection. The initial setting fromthe factory is OFF.

LIGHT FLASH: If your vehicle has RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE), this option which allows thevehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting to flashevery time the lock, unlock, or trunk releasebuttons on the RKE transmitter are pressed, canbe enabled or disabled. When LIGHT FLASHappears on the display, press the enter button tomove between OFF and ON. When you havemade your choice, press the MENU buttonto record your selection. The initial setting fromthe factory is ON.

218

DELAY LOCK: The delayed locking option, whichdelays the actual locking of the vehicle, can beenabled or disabled. When DELAY LOCK appearson the display, press the enter button to movebetween OFF and ON. When you have made yourchoice, press the MENU button to record yourselection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.

AUTO UNLK (Unlock): The automatic doorunlocking option, which allows the vehicleto automatically unlock certain doors can beenabled or disabled. When AUTO UNLK appearson the display, press the enter button to movebetween ALL, DRIVER, or NONE. When you havemade your choice, press and the MENU buttonto record your selection. The initial setting from thefactory is ALL.

If you have a manual transaxle vehicle, thedoor(s) will automatically unlock when the ignitionis turned off.

If you have an automatic transaxle vehicle, youcan select when the automatic unlocking will occur.See “UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic TransaxleOnly)” following.

See Programmable Automatic Door Unlock onpage 112 for more information.

UNLK (Unlock) (Automatic Transaxle Only): Thisscreen displays only if your vehicle has anautomatic transaxle and DRIVER or ALL is selectedfor the AUTO UNLK option. This option determineswhen the automatic door unlocking will occur, wheneither the key is turned to OFF or the vehicle isshifted into PARK (P). When UNLK appears on thedisplay, press the enter button to move betweenKEY OFF and SHIFT TO P (Park). When you havemade your choice, press the MENU button torecord your selection. The initial setting from thefactory is SHIFT TO P (Park). See ProgrammableAutomatic Door Unlock on page 112 for moreinformation.

EXT (Exterior) LIGHTS: If your vehicle hasRemote Keyless Entry (RKE), this option, whichallows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter lightingto turn on each time the unlock button on the RKEtransmitter is pressed, can be enabled ordisabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on thedisplay, press the enter button to move betweenON and OFF. When you have made yourchoice, press the MENU button to record yourselection. The initial setting from the factory is ON.

219

LANGUAGE: To select your choice of language,press the enter button to move between theoptional languages.

The languages are ENGLISH, FRENCH,SPANISH, and GERMAN.

Choosing a language will display all of theinformation on the DIC in the desired language.

When you have made your choice, press theMENU button for at least one second to recordyour selection. The initial setting from the factory isENGLISH.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 260. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’saudio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While your

vehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

220

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer/retailer. Also, checkfederal rules covering mobile radio andtelephone units. If sound equipment can beadded, it is very important to do it properly.Added sound equipment may interfere with theoperation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, orother systems, and even damage them. Yourvehicle’s systems may interfere with theoperation of sound equipment that hasbeen added.

Your vehicle has a feature called RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audiosystem can be played even after the ignitionis turned off. See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 125 for more information.

Setting the Time

Radios without Radio DataSystems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button. The clocksymbol displays and the hour flashes. Turn theADJ (adjust) knob to increase or to decrease thehours. To set the minutes, press the clockbutton again. The minutes flash. Turn the ADJknob to increase or to decrease the minutes. Thetime can be set with the ignition on or off.

221

Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS)To set the hour, press the clock button. Theclock symbol displays and the hour flashes. Turnthe ADJ (adjust) knob to increase or to decreasethe hours. To set the minutes, press the clockbutton again. The minutes. Turn the ADJ knob toincrease or to decrease the minutes. The timecan be set with the ignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the clock button toenter the clock set mode, then press and hold theclock button for three seconds until UPDATEDdisplays. If the time is not available from thestation, NO UPDATE displays.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuningto an RDS broadcast station, it can take a fewminutes for the time to update.

Radio with CD (Base Level)

Playing the Radio

O (Power): Press theO knob to turn thesystem on and off.

u (Volume): Turn theu knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

United States shown, Canada similar

222

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the time and the temperature orthe radio station frequency and the temperature.When the ignition is off, press this knob to displaythe time.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until the desired option displays,then hold the knob for two seconds. The radioproduces a beep and the selected displaybecomes the default.

Finding a Station

AM/FM/CD: Press this button to switch betweenFM1, FM2, AM, and CD. The selection displays.

ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radiostations.

x SEEK w: Press the down x or up w SEEKarrow to go to the next or to the previous stationand stay there.

To scan stations, press and hold either the downx or up w SEEK arrow for two seconds untila beep sounds. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the next station.Press either the down x or up w SEEKarrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold either thedown x or up w SEEK arrow for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound. The radiogoes to the first preset station stored on thepushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. Press either thedown x or up w SEEK arrow again to stopscanning presets.

The radio only seeks and scans stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

223

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press AM/FM/CD to select FM1, FM2, or AM.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

TONE / P / Q (Bass/Treble): To adjust the bassor the treble, press and release the tone buttonuntil BASS or TREB (treble) displays. Turnthe ADJ (adjust) knob to increase or to decreasethe tone. If a station is weak or has static,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass or treble to the middle position,select BASS or TREB. Then press and hold thetone button for more than two seconds. A beepsounds and the level adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust the tone controls to the middle position,first exit tone by pressing another button, causingthe radio to perform that function, or by waitingfive seconds until the default display returns. Thenpress and hold the tone button for more thantwo seconds until a beep sounds. ALLCENTERED displays.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL/FADE /S (Balance/Fade): To adjustthe balance between the right and the leftspeakers, press and release the S balanceand fade button until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the ADJ knob to move the sound toward theright or the left speakers.

224

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, press and release the Sbalance and fade button until FADE displays.Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound towardthe front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance or the fade to the middleposition, select BAL or FADE. Then press and holdthe S balance and fade button for morethan two seconds. A beep sounds and the leveladjusts to the middle position.

To adjust the speaker controls to the middleposition, first exit balance and fade by pressinganother button, causing the radio to performthat function, or by waiting five seconds until thedefault display returns. Then press and holdthe balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds until A beep sounds. ALLCENTERED displays.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE displays, it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for your vehicle andmust be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take thevehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. If you want to insert a CD with the ignitionoff, first press the EJECTZ button or theDISP knob.

As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playing,where it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

225

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 256 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

1s (Reverse): Press and hold thes buttonto reverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release thes button to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

2\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold the\button to advance quickly within a track. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Release the\ pushbutton to play the passage. Theelapsed time of the track displays.

226

3 RPT (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once tohear a track over again. REPEAT ON andRPT displays. The current track continues torepeat. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.REPEAT OFF displays and RPT disappears fromthe display.

4 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. T#, RANDOM, and RDM displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play. RANDOM OFFdisplays and RDM disappears.

SEEK w: Press the up w SEEK arrow to goto the start of the current track if more thaneight seconds have played. The track numberdisplays. If this button is pressed more than once,the player continues moving backward throughthe CD.

If this button is held for more than two seconds,the CD enters CD scan mode and the CDplays the first 10 seconds of each track. Press theup w SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

SEEK x: Press the down x SEEK arrow to goto the previous track. The track number displays.If this button is pressed more than once, the playercontinues moving forward through the CD.

If this button is held for more than two seconds,the CD enters CD scan mode and the CDplays the first 10 seconds of each track. Press thedown x SEEK arrow again to stop scanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see the currenttrack number, time, and temperature or thetrack number, the elapsed time of the track, andthe temperature.

To change the default on the display, press thisknob until the desired option displays, thenhold the knob for two seconds. A beep soundsand the selected display becomes the default.

AM/FM/CD: Press this button when listening tothe radio to play a CD.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press the EJECT /Zbutton to eject a CD. Eject can be activated witheither the ignition or radio off. CDs can beloaded with the ignition and radio off if this buttonis pressed first.

227

CD MessagesIf the CD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If theradio displays an error message, write it down andprovide it to your dealer/retailer when reportingthe problem.

Radio with CD (Upper Level)

If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system,included are eight speakers and an eight channelamplifier. The radio displays MONSOON whenthe radio or the ignition is turned on. Seeyour dealer/retailer for details.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.


228

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters appear on the displayinstead of the frequency. RDS stations canalso provide the time of day, a program type (PTY)for current programming, and the name of theprogram being broadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio


u (Volume): Turn theO knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decreasethe volume.

229

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between the time and the temperature orthe radio station frequency and the temperature.When the ignition is off, press this knob to displaythe time.

For RDS, press this knob to change what appearson the display while using RDS. The displayoptions are station name, RDS station frequency,PTY, and the name of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), press this knob whilein XM mode to retrieve four different categories ofinformation related to the current song orchannel: Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY,Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until you see the desired display, thenhold the knob for two seconds. The radioproduces a beep and the selected display is nowthe default.

AUTOu (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press theAUTOu button to select LOW, MEDIUM,or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW, AUTO VOL MEDIUM,or AUTO VOL HIGH displays. Each highersetting allows for more volume compensation atfaster vehicle speeds. As you drive, automaticvolume increases the volume, as necessary, toovercome noise at any speed. The volumelevel should always sound the same to you as youdrive. AUTO VOL NONE displays if the radiocannot determine the vehicle speed or if theengine is not running. To turn automatic volumeoff, press the AUTOu button until AUTOVOL OFF displays.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.



230


To scan preset stations, press and hold either thedown x or up w SEEK arrow for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound. The radiogoes to the first preset station stored on thepushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. Press either thedown x or up w SEEK arrow again to stopscanning presets.


Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.


4. Press AUTO TONE or AUTO EQ to select theequalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.


231

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE / P / Q (Bass/Treble): Press and releasethis button until BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the ADJ (adjust) knob toincrease or to decrease the tone. The displayshows the bass, midrange, or treble level. If astation is weak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB. Thenpress and hold the tone button for more thantwo seconds. One beep sounds and the tonecontrol adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position,press and hold the tone button while no tone controlis displayed. ALL CENTERED displays and a beepsounds. The bass, midrange, and treble adjusts tothe middle position.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forcountry, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOTONE or AUTO EQ button until CUSTOMdisplays. You can also manually adjust the bass,midrange, and treble using the tone button.


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance between the right and the leftspeakers, push and release the Sbalance and fade button until BAL displays. Turnthe ADJ (adjust) knob to move the soundtoward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and the rearspeakers, push and release the S balanceand fade button until FADE displays. Turn the ADJknob to move the sound toward the front or therear speakers.

232

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold theS balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds. One beep sounds and the speakercontrol adjusts to the middle position.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middleposition, push and hold the tone button while nospeaker control is displayed. ALL CENTEREDdisplays and One beep sounds. The balance andfade adjusts to the middle position.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. PTY for FM or PTYPE forXM™ and a program type displays.

2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press theup w SEEK arrow to select the PTY and totake you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY pressthe up w SEEK arrow again. If the radiocannot find the desired PTY, NONE FOUNDdisplays and the radio returns to the laststation you were listening to.After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPEbutton is pressed again, the radio exitsprogram type select mode.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. FM ALT FREQ ON and AFdisplays. The radio can switch to stations with astronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. FM ALT FREQ OFFdisplays and AF disappears from the display.The radio does not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

233

RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current station has amessage, MSG displays. Press this button to seethe message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage appears every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theMSG button. A new group of words displayafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage has displayed, MSG disappears fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe MSG button. You can view the last messageuntil a new message is received or a differentstation is tuned to.

When a message is not available from a station,NO MESSAGE displays.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAFFIC displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements. When atraffic announcement broadcasts on the tunedradio station, you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found, theradio stops seeking and TRAF in brackets displays.If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC INFO displays.

If TRAF is on the display, press the TRAF button toturn off the traffic announcements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement even if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the play of a CDif the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

234

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE displays, it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for your vehicle and itmust be returned to your dealer/retailer for service.

LOCKED: This message displays when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take yourvehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.


Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 252 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. If you want to insert a CD with the ignitionoff, first press the eject button or the DISP(display) knob.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing, where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.


If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD does not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 256 for more information.


235




s (Reverse): Press and hold thespushbutton to reverse quickly within a track. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethes button to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold the\pushbutton to advance quickly within a track. Youwill hear sound at a reduced volume. Releasethe\ button to play the passage. The elapsedtime of the track displays.

RPT (Repeat): Press this button once to hear atrack over again. REPEAT ON and RPT displays.The current track continues to repeat. PressRPT again to turn off repeat play. REPEAT OFFdisplays and RPT disappears from the display.

RDM (Random): Press this button to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.T#, RANDOM, and RDM displays. T and thetrack number displays when each track starts toplay. Press RDM again to turn off randomplay. RANDOM OFF displays and RDM disappearsfrom the display.

x SEEK w: Press the down x SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track if more thaneight seconds have played. If this arrow is pressedmore than once, the player continues movingbackward through the CD.

236

Press the up w SEEK arrow to go to the start ofthe next track. If this arrow is pressed morethan once, the player continues moving forwardthrough the CD.

If either the down x or up w SEEK arrow is heldor pressed for more than two seconds, the CDenters CD scan mode and the CD plays the first10 seconds of each track. Press either thedown x or up w SEEK arrow again to stopscanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how longthe current track has been playing. T, the tracknumber, and the elapsed time of the track displays.To change the default on the display, time orelapsed time, press the knob until you seethe desired display, then hold the knob fortwo seconds. The radio produces one beep andthe selected display is now the default. Pressingthis button also displays text on commerciallyrecorded CDs (if available).

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select thedesired equalization setting while playing aCD. The equalization is automatically recalledwhen a CD is played. For more information, seeAUTO TONE/AUTO EQ listed previously inthis section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhile a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CDor to access a remote device (if installed)while listening to the radio.

EJECT /Z (Eject): Press the EJECT /Zbutton to eject a CD. Eject can be activated witheither the ignition or radio off. CDs can beloaded with the ignition and radio off if this buttonis pressed first.

237

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:









Radio with Six-Disc CD

If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system,included are eight speakers and an eight channelamplifier. The radio displays MONSOON whenthe radio or the ignition is turned on. Seeyour dealer for details.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.


238

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,

traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio


u (Volume): Turn theu knob to clockwise orcounterclockwise increase or to decrease thevolume.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch thedisplay between time and temperature orradio station frequency and temperature. Whenthe ignition is off, press this knob to displaythe time.

For RDS, press the DISP knob to change whatdisplays while using RDS. The display options arestation name, RDS station frequency, PTY, andthe name of the program (if available).

239

For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knobwhile in XM mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, press theDISP knob until you see the desired display, thenhold the knob for two seconds. A beep soundsand the selected display is now the default.

AUTOu (Automatic Volume): With automaticvolume, the audio system adjusts automaticallyto make up for road and wind noise as you drive.

Set the volume at the desired level. Press theAUTOu button to select LOW, MEDIUM, orHIGH. AUTO VOL LOW, AUTO VOL MEDIUM, orAUTO VOL HIGH displays. Each higher settingallows for more volume compensation at fastervehicle speeds. Then as you drive, automaticvolume increases the volume, as necessary, toovercome noise at any speed. The volume levelshould always sound the same to you as you drive.AUTO VOL NONE displays if the radio cannotdetermine the vehicle speed or if the engine is notrunning. To turn automatic volume off, press theAUTOu button until AUTO VOL OFF displays.

Finding a StationBAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.




To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherthe down x or up w SEEK arrow for more thanfour seconds until two beeps sound. The radio goesto the first preset station stored on the pushbuttons,plays for a few seconds, then goes to the nextpreset station. Press either the downx or up wSEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.


240

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.


4. Press AUTO TONE or AUTO EQ to select theequalization.

5. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.


Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE / P / Q (Bass/Treble): Press and releasethis button until BASS, MID (midrange), or TREB(treble) displays. Turn the ADJ (adjusts) knob toincrease or to decrease the tone. The displayshows the bass, mid, or treble level. If a station isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to themiddle position, select BASS, MID, or TREB.Then press and hold the tone button for more thantwo seconds. The display level adjusts to the middleposition and a beep sounds.

To adjust all tone controls to the middle position,press and hold the tone button when no tonecontrol is displayed. ALL CENTERED displays anda beep sounds.

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings designed forcountry, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.

241

The equalization setting last chosen appears onthe display when you first press this button.Each time you press this button, anotherequalization setting displays and automatic tone orautomatic equalization switches to that presetequalization setting.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOTONE or AUTO EQ button until CUSTOMdisplays. Then manually adjust the bass,midrange, and treble using the tone button.


BAL/FADE / S (Balance/Fade): Toadjust the balance between the right and the leftspeakers, push and release the Sbalance and fade button until BAL displays. Turnthe ADJ (adjust) knob to move the soundtoward the right or the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and release the S balanceand fade button until FADE displays. Turn the ADJknob to move the sound toward the front or therear speakers.

To adjust balance or fade to the middle position,select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold theS balance and fade button for more thantwo seconds. The display level adjusts to themiddle position and a beep sounds.

To adjust both speaker controls to the middleposition, press and hold the tone button while nospeaker control is displayed. ALL CENTEREDdisplays and a beep sounds.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. PTY for FM or PTYPE forXM™ and a program type displays.

2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press theup w SEEK arrow to select and to take youto the PTY’s first station.

242

4. To go to another station within that PTY pressthe up w SEEK arrow again. If the radiocannot find the desired PTY, NONE FOUNDdisplays and the radio returns to the laststation you were listening to.

5. Press P-TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.

If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radiosearches for stations with the selected PTY andtraffic announcements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a strongerstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. FM ALT FREQ ON and AFdisplays. The radio can switch to stations with astronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. FM ALT FREQ OFFdisplays and AF disappears from the display.The radio does not switch to other stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.

ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

MSG (Message): If the current station has amessage, MSG displays. Press this button to seethe message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.

If the entire message is not displayed, parts ofthe message appears every three seconds.To scroll through the message, press and releasethe MSG button. A new group of words displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has displayed, MSG disappears fromthe display until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe MSG button. You can view the last messageuntil a new message is received or a differentstation is tuned to.

243

When a message is not available from a station,NO MESSAGE displays.

MSG (Traffic): If TRAFFIC displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements. When atraffic announcement broadcasts on the tunedradio station, you will hear it.

If the current tuned station does not broadcasttraffic announcements, press and hold this buttonfor two seconds and the radio seeks to astation that does. When a station that broadcaststraffic announcements is found, the radio stopsseeking and TRAF in brackets displays. When atraffic announcement broadcasts on the tunedradio station, you will hear it. If no station is foundthat broadcasts traffic announcements, NOTRAFFIC INFO displays.

If TRAF is on the display, press and hold the MSGbutton for two seconds to turn off the trafficannouncements.

The radio plays the traffic announcement even ifthe volume is low. The radio interrupts theplay of a CD if the last tuned station broadcaststraffic announcements.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio Messages

CALIBRATE: The audio system has beencalibrated for your vehicle from the factory. IfCALIBRATE displays it means that the radio hasnot been configured properly for the vehicleand it must be returned to your dealer/retailerfor service.

LOCKED: This message is displayed when theTHEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Takeyour vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.


Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 252 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selectedaudio source.

244

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol appearson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.


If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD does not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 256 for more information.





LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs intothe CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for INSERT CD to flash on the display.

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.

245

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep sounds and MULTI LOAD CDdisplays, then INSERT CD and the numberdisplays.

3. Once INSERT CD and the number displays,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into theslot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, INSERT CD andthe number displays again. Once INSERT CDand the number displays again, you canload another CD. The CD player takes up tosix CDs. Do not try to load more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, the radio begins to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, anumber for each CD is displayed and the currentlyselected slot number is underlined.

EJECT/Z: To eject a single CD press theEJECT/Z button. The radio displays EJECTINGCD # and the single CD symbol flashes until theCD is ready to be removed. When the CD is readyto be removed it ejects part way from the radioand the display changes to a flashing REMOVECD # with the single CD symbol flashing untilthe CD is removed. If the CD is not removed within25 seconds the radio pulls it back in.

To eject multiple CDs, press and hold theEJECT/Z button until a beep sounds andEJECTING ALL CDS displays with the single CDsymbol flashing. The CD symbol flashes untila CD is ready to be removed. When the CD isready to be removed it ejects part way fromthe radio and the display changes to a flashingREMOVE CD # with the single CD symbol flashinguntil the CD is removed. If the CD is not removedwithin 25 seconds the radio pulls it back in.After the CD is removed the radio repeats theprevious actions until all of the CDs havebeen removed or a CD is pulled back in.

246

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number appears on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD youwant to play. A small bar appears under the CDnumber that is playing, and the track numberdisplays.


s (Reverse): Press and hold thes button toreverse quickly within a track. You will hearsound at a reduced volume. Release thesbutton to play the passage. T#, the elapsed time,and REV displays.

\ (Fast Forward): Press and hold the\button to advance quickly within a track. You willhear sound at a reduced volume. Release the\ button to play the passage. T#, the elapsedtime, and FWD displays.

RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entireCD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. REPEAT ONand RPT displays. Press RPT again to turn offrepeat play. REPEAT OFF displays andRPT disappears from the display.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for more thantwo seconds. REPEAT ON and RPT displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.REPEAT OFF displays and RPT disappearsfrom the display.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random, rather thansequential, order, on one CD or on all of the CDs.

247

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD you are listeningto in random order, press the RDM button.RANDOM TRACKS and RDM displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play. RANDOMOFF displays and RDM disappears from thedisplay.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded, in random order, press and hold theRDM button for more than two seconds. A beepsounds, RANDOM ALL CDS, and RDMdisplays. Press RDM again to turn off randomplay. RANDOM OFF displays and RDMdisappears from the display.

x SEEK w: Press the down x SEEK arrow togo to the start of the current track, if more thaneight seconds have played. Press the up w SEEKarrow to go to the beginning of the next track. Ifeither the down x or up w SEEK arrow is held orpressed more than once, the player continuesmoving backward or forward through the CD.

To scan the current CD, press and hold either thedownx or up w SEEK arrow for more thantwo seconds. The CD goes to the next track, playsthe first 10 seconds, then goes to the next track.Press either the down x or up w SEEKarrow again to stop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press and holdeither the down x or up w SEEK arrow for morethan four seconds. The CD goes to the nextCD, plays the first 10 seconds of the first track,then goes to the next CD. Press either thedown x or up w SEEK arrow again to stopscanning.

DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch betweentime, temperature, and the elapsed time of thetrack. To change the default on the display (CD#/Track#/Time, CD#/Track#/Temperature, orTrack#/Elapsed Time/Temperature), press the knobuntil you see the desired display, then hold the knobfor two seconds. The radio produces one beep andthe selected display is now the default.

248

AUTO TONE/AUTO EQ (AutomaticEqualization): Press this button to select thedesired equalization setting while playing aCD. The equalization is set when a CD is played.For more information, see “AUTO TONE” or“AUTO EQ” listed previously in this section.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainsinside the radio for future listening.

SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CDor to access the remote device, when listeningto the radio.

Using Song List / R ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the radio on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not display. IfS-LIST is present, press the R button toturn it off.

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use theup SEEK arrow to locate the track to besaved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the R button for two or moreseconds to save the track into memory. Whensong list is pressed, one beep sounds.After two seconds of pressing song listcontinuously, two beeps sound to confirm thatthe track has been saved and TRACKnumber ADDED displays.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

249

SONG LIST FULL displays if you try to save morethan 20 selections.

To play the song list, press the song list button.One beep sounds and SONG LIST displays.The recorded tracks begins to play in the orderthat they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the x SEEKw arrows. Seeking past the last saved trackreturns you to the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the R button to turn song list on.SONG LIST displays.

3. Press the x SEEK w arrows to select thedesired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the R button for two seconds.When song list is pressed, one beep sounds.After two seconds of continuously pressingthe song list button, two beeps sound toconfirm that the track has been deleted andTRACK number DELETED displays.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the R button to turn song list on.S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the R button for more thanfour seconds. A beep sounds, followed bytwo beeps after two seconds, and a final beepsounds after four seconds. SONG LISTEMPTY displays indicating that the song listhas been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the R button.One beep sounds and S-LIST is removed from thedisplay.

250

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message appears on thedisplay and/or the CD comes out, it could be forone of the following reasons:









251

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after 4 second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. This message shoulddisappear shortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune toanother channel.

CH Unavail Channel nolonger available

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.Tune to another station. If this station was one of thepresets, choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

No Info Song/Program Titlenot available

No song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

252

Radio Display Message Condition Action Required

No Info Category Namenot available

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in your vehicle may have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with your dealer/retailer.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, theremay be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure in thereceiver module

If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver may have a fault. Consult with yourdealer/retailer.

253

Theft-Deterrent FeatureTHEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theftof your vehicle’s radio. The feature worksautomatically by learning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN). If the radio is movedto a different vehicle, it does not operate andLOCKED displays.With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio cannotoperate if stolen.

Audio Steering Wheel ControlsIf your vehicle has thisfeature, some audiocontrols can be adjustedat the steering wheel.They include thefollowing:

x w: Press the up or the down arrow to go tothe next or to the previous radio station andstay there. The radio only seeks stations with astrong signal that are in the selected band.

To scan stations, press and hold either arrow fortwo seconds until SCAN displays and a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither arrow again to stop scanning.

When a CD is playing, press the up or the downarrow to go to the next or previous track.

To scan the current CD, press and hold either upor down arrow for more than two seconds. TheCD goes to the next track, plays the first10 seconds, then goes to the next track. Presseither up or down arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan all of the CDs loaded, press andhold either up or down arrow for more thanfour seconds. The CD goes to the next CD, playsthe first 10 seconds of each track, then goes tothe next CD. Press either up or down arrow againto stop scanning.

+ − (Volume): Press the plus or minus button toincrease or to decrease the volume.

254

1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button toplay stations that are programmed on theradio preset pushbuttons. The radio only seekspreset stations with a strong signal that are in theselected band.

When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer,press this button to go to the next availableCD, if multiple CDs are loaded.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static during normalradio reception can occur if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations boost

the power levels during the day, and then reducethese levels during the night. Static can also occurwhen things like storms and power lines interferewith radio reception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

255

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD does not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base located on theroof of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

Backglass AntennaThe AM-FM antenna is integrated with the rearwindow defogger, located in the rear window.Make sure that the inside surface of the rearwindow is not scratched and that the grid lines onthe glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaceis damaged, it could interfere with radio reception.

Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp objectto clear the inside rear window may damagethe rear window antenna and/or the rearwindow defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Do not clear theinside rear window with sharp objects.

256

Notice: Do not apply aftermarket glass tintingwith metallic film. The metallic film in sometinting materials will interfere with or distort theincoming radio reception. Any damagecaused to your backglass antenna due tometallic tinting materials will not be coveredby your warranty.

Because this antenna is built into the rear window,there is a reduced risk of damage caused bycar washes and vandals.

If adding a cellular telephone to your vehicle, andthe antenna needs to be attached to the glass,make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FMantenna are not damaged. There is enough spacebetween the grid lines to attach a cellulartelephone antenna without interfering with radioreception.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

257

✍ NOTES

258

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 260Defensive Driving ...................................... 260Drunken Driving ........................................ 261Control of a Vehicle .................................. 264Braking ...................................................... 264Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 265Braking in Emergencies ............................. 267Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 268Enhanced Traction System (ETS) .............. 270StabiliTrak® System ................................... 271Steering .................................................... 272Off-Road Recovery .................................... 275Passing ..................................................... 276Loss of Control .......................................... 277Driving at Night ......................................... 279

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 280City Driving ............................................... 284Freeway Driving ........................................ 285Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 286Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 287Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 288Winter Driving ........................................... 290If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,

Mud, Ice, or Snow ................................. 294Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 295Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 296

Towing ........................................................ 302Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 302Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 302Towing a Trailer ........................................ 306

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

259

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 22.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-end collisionsare about the most preventable ofaccidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything that distractsfrom the driving task makes properdefensive driving more difficult and caneven cause a collision, with resultinginjury. Ask a passenger to help do thesethings, or pull off the road in a safe place todo them. These simple defensive drivingtechniques could save your life.

260

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol,with more than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly halfthe adult population — choose never to drinkalcohol, so they never drive after drinking.For persons under 21, it is against the law inevery U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are goodmedical, psychological, and developmentalreasons for these laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

261

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,if the same person drank three double martinis(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.A person who consumes food just before or duringdrinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the same numberof drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.In some other countries, the limit is even lower.For example, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercialdrivers in the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

262

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee or numberof cold showers will speed that up. “I will be careful”is not the right answer. What if there is anemergency, a need to take sudden action, as whena child darts into the street? A person with even amoderate BAC might not be able to react quicklyenough to avoid the collision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

263

Control of a VehicleThe following three systems help to control yourvehicle while driving — brakes, steering, andaccelerator. At times, as when driving on snowor ice, it is easy to ask more of those controlsystems than the tires and road can provide.Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 268,Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 270,and StabiliTrak® System on page 271.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessoriescan affect your vehicle’s performance.See Accessories and Modifications on page 316.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 200.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths ofa second. But that is only an average. It mightbe less with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

264

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 316.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle might have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS,this warning light on theinstrument panel willcome on brieflywhen you start yourvehicle.

When you start the engine, or when you begin todrive away, ABS will check itself. You mighthear a momentary motor or clicking noise whilethis test is going on, and you might evennotice that the brake pedal moves or pulses alittle. This is normal.

265

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue brakingwhile trying to avoid the animal. Here is whathappens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachwheel. See Braking in Emergencies on page 267.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmedto make the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, the computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

266

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedal oralways decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply the brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though you have ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You might feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.See Braking in Emergencies on page 267.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard andhold it down — might be the wrong thing to do.

Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do,the vehicle cannot respond to your steering.Momentum will carry it in whatever direction itwas headed when the wheels stopped rolling.That could be off the road, into the very thing youwere trying to avoid, or into traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding,ease off the brake pedal. This will help you retainsteering control. If you do have ABS, it isdifferent. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) onpage 265.

In many emergencies, steering can help you morethan even the very best braking.

267

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System(TCS) that limits wheel spin. This is especiallyuseful in slippery road conditions. The systemoperates only if it senses that one or both of thefront wheels are spinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, the system reducesengine power and may also upshift the transaxleto limit wheel spin. Also, the traction control systemactivates the appropriate corner brakes to gaineven quicker control to limit wheel spin.

This light, located on theinstrument panel, willcome on when yourTraction Control Systemis limiting wheel spin.


If your vehicle is in cruise control when thetraction control system begins to limit wheel spin,the cruise control will automatically disengage.

When road conditions allow you to safely use itagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 173.

The Traction Control System operates in alltransaxle shift lever positions except park orneutral. But the system can upshift the transaxleonly as high as the shift lever position you’vechosen, so you should use the lower gears onlywhen necessary. See Automatic TransaxleOperation on page 130.

This light is located onthe instrument panelcluster.

When the system is on, this light will come on tolet you know if there’s a problem, or if thesystem has been turned off.

268

When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the TractionControl System on. But you can turn the system offif you prefer.

To turn the system on or off, press the tractioncontrol button (TC) located under the climatecontrols. In order to effectively “rock” the vehicle,you will need to turn off TCS.

If you press the TC button once, the traction controlsystem will turn off and the traction control systemwarning light will come on. The StabiliTrak® systemwill stay on. Press the TC button again to turn thesystem back on. The traction control systemwarning light will go off. If you press and hold theTC button, the StabiliTrak® system and the traction

control system will turn off. Press the TC buttonagain to turn StabiliTrak® and the traction controlsystem back on. For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 271.

When you turn the system off, the Traction ControlSystem warning light will come on and stay on.If the Traction Control System is limiting wheel spinwhen you press the button to turn the systemoff, the warning light will come on – but the systemwon’t turn off right away. It will wait until there’sno longer a current need to limit wheel spin.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 316 for more information.

269

Enhanced Traction System (ETS)Your vehicle may have an Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in slippery road conditions.The system operates only if it senses that oneor both of the front wheels are spinning orbeginning to lose traction. When this happens,the system reduces engine power and mayalso upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin.

This light, located onthe instrument panel,will come on when yourEnhanced TractionSystem is limitingwheel spin.


If your vehicle is in cruise control when theenhanced traction system begins to limit wheelspin, the cruise control will automatically disengage.

When road conditions allow you to safely use itagain, you may re-engage the cruise control.See Cruise Control on page 173.

The Enhanced Traction System operates in alltransaxle shift lever positions except park, neutralor reverse. But the system can upshift thetransaxle only as high as the shift lever positionyou’ve chosen, so you should use the lower gearsonly when necessary. See Automatic TransaxleOperation on page 130.


When the system is on, this light will come on tolet you know if there’s a problem, or if thesystem has been turned off.

When this warning light is on, the system will notlimit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.

270

To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery roadconditions, you should always leave the EnhancedTraction System on. But you can turn the systemoff if you prefer.

To turn the system on or off, press the tractioncontrol button located on the instrument panel.In order to effectively “rock” the vehicle, youwill need to turn off the traction control system.

When you turn the system off, the EnhancedTraction System warning light will come on andstay on. If the Enhanced Traction System islimiting wheel spin when you press the button toturn the system off, the warning light will comeon – but the system won’t turn off right away.It will wait until there’s no longer a current needto limit wheel spin.

You can turn the system back on at any time bypressing the button again. The Enhanced TractionSystem warning light should go off.

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may be equipped with a vehiclestability enhancement system called StabiliTrak®.It is an advanced computer controlled systemthat assists you with directional control ofthe vehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak® activates when the computer sensesa discrepancy between your intended pathand the direction the vehicle is actually traveling.StabiliTrak® selectively applies braking pressureat any one of the vehicle’s brakes to help steer thevehicle in the direction which you are steering.

This symbol will appearwhen the StabiliTrak®

system is activated.

When you first start your vehicle and begin to driveaway, the system performs several diagnosticchecks to insure there are no problems. You mayhear or feel the system working. This is normal anddoes not mean there is a problem with your vehicle.

271


When the system is on, this light will come on tolet you know if there’s a problem, or if thesystem has been turned off.StabiliTrak® comes on automatically whenever youstart your vehicle. To help assist you withdirectional control of the vehicle, you shouldalways leave the system on. You can turn thetraction control system and StabiliTrak® off if youever need to by pressing and holding the TC(traction control) on/off button. Press the TC buttonagain to turn StabiliTrak® and the traction controlsystem back on. See Traction Control System(TCS) on page 268 for more information.

If your vehicle is in cruise control when theStabiliTrak® activates, the cruise control willautomatically disengage. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, you may reengagethe cruise control. See Cruise Control onpage 173 for more information.

Steering

Electric Power SteeringIf your vehicle has the electric power steeringsystem and the engine stalls while you are driving,the power steering assist system will continue tooperate until you are able to stop your vehicle.If you lose power steering assist because theelectric power steering system is not functioning,you can steer, but it will take more effort.

If you turn the steering wheel in either directionseveral times until it stops, or hold the steeringwheel in the stopped position for an extendedamount of time, you may notice a reduced amountof power steering assist. The normal amount ofpower steering assist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.

The electric power steering system does notrequire regular maintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, contact yourdealer/retailer for service repairs. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 214.

272

Hydraulic Power SteeringIf your vehicle has the hydraulic power steeringsystem and you lose power steering assistbecause the engine stops or the power steeringsystem is not functioning, you can steer, but it willtake much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentionedon the news happen on curves. Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when drivingon curves. The traction of the tires against theroad surface makes it possible for the vehicle tochange its path when you turn the front wheels.If there is no traction, inertia will keep thevehicle going in the same direction. If you haveever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, youwill understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of the tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is the onefactor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both controlsystems — steering and braking — have to dotheir work where the tires meet the road. Unlessyou have four-wheel anti-lock brakes, addingthe hard braking can demand too much of thoseplaces. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm those placeswhere the tires meet the road and make you losecontrol. See Traction Control System (TCS) onpage 268, Enhanced Traction System (ETS) onpage 270 and StabiliTrak® System on page 271.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

273

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whilethe front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.

Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories canaffect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 316.

Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you comeover a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane,or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, ora child darts out from between parked carsand stops right in front of you. You can avoidthese problems by braking — if you can stop intime. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.That is the time for evasive action — steeringaround the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply the brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lock thewheels. See Braking on page 264. It is betterto remove as much speed as you can froma possible collision. Then steer around theproblem, to the left or right depending on thespace available.

274

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below thepavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease offthe accelerator and then, if there is nothing in theway, steer so that your vehicle straddles the edgeof the pavement. You can turn the steering wheelup to one-quarter turn until the right front tirecontacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steeringwheel to go straight down the roadway.

275

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds.A miscalculation, an error in judgment, or a briefsurrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with the worstof all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, andlines. If you can see a sign up ahead that mightindicate a turn or an intersection, delay yourpass. A broken center line usually indicates it isall right to pass, providing the road ahead isclear. Never cross a solid line on your side ofthe lane or a double solid line, even if the roadseems empty of approaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want topass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reduces yourarea of vision, especially if you are following alarger vehicle. Also, you will not have adequatespace if the vehicle ahead suddenly slows orstops. Keep back a reasonable distance.

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the right laneand do not get too close. Time your move soyou will be increasing speed as the time comesto move into the other lane. If the way is clear topass, you will have a running start that morethan makes up for the distance you would loseby dropping back. And if something happens tocause you to cancel your pass, you need onlyslow down and drop back again and wait foranother opportunity.

276

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane change signalbefore moving out of the right lane to pass.When you are far enough ahead of the passedvehicle to see its front in your vehicle’s insidemirror, activate the right lane change signal andmove back into the right lane. Remember thatan outside convex mirror makes the vehicleyou just passed seem farther away from youthan it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a timeon two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps are notflashing, it might be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,the wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

277

A cornering skid is best handled by easing yourfoot off the accelerator pedal.

If your vehicle does not have a traction system, orif the traction system is off, an acceleration skidis also best handled by easing your foot offthe accelerator pedal. See Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 270, Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 268, or StabiliTrak®

System on page 271.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reducedtraction, try your best to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lower gear. Any suddenchanges could cause the tires to slide. You maynot realize the surface is slippery until yourvehicle is skidding. Learn to recognizewarning clues — such as enough water, ice, orpacked snow on the road to make a mirroredsurface — and slow down when you haveany doubt.

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid.If you do not have ABS, then in a brakingskid, where the wheels are no longer rolling,release enough pressure on the brakes to getthe wheels rolling again. This restores steeringcontrol. Push the brake pedal down steadily whenyou have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheelsare rolling, you will have steering control.

278

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, slow down andkeep more space between you and othervehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver might require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They might cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make a lotof things invisible.

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

279

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less ofa roadway when you are in a turn or curve.Keep your eyes moving; that way, it is easier topick out dimly lighted objects. Just as theheadlamps should be checked regularly for properaim, so should your eyes be examined regularly.Some drivers suffer from night blindness — theinability to see in dim light — and are not evenaware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble.On a wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate,or turn as well because your tire-to-roadtraction is not as good as on dry roads.

280

And, if your tires do not have much tread left, youwill get even less traction. It is always wise togo slower and be cautious if rain starts to fallwhile you are driving. The surface may get wetsuddenly when your reflexes are tuned for drivingon dry pavement.

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see.Even if your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield,or when strips of rubber start to separate fromthe inserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect your brakes.Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, try toslow down before you hit them.

281

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it canif your tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple thewater’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drive throughthem very slowly.

282

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of flowingwater can carry away a smaller vehicle.If this happens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do not ignorepolice warning signs, and otherwise bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especiallycareful when you pass another vehicle.Allow yourself more clear room ahead, andbe prepared to have your view restricted byroad spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth.See Tires on page 374.

283

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 285.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal.A traffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a lightturns green, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

284

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway driving is:Keep up with traffic and keep to the right.Drive at the same speed most of the other driversare driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaksa smooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane ona freeway as a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp,you should begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Try tomerge into the gap at close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

285

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors.Then use your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested.If you must start when you are not fresh — such asafter a day’s work — do not plan to make too manymiles that first part of the journey. Wear comfortableclothing and shoes you can easily drive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all acrossNorth America. They will be ready and willing tohelp if you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

286

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine,and the rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!

If it does, your vehicle can leave the road inless than a second, and you could crash andbe injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis?First, be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

287

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

288

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The mostimportant thing to know is this: let your enginedo some of the slowing down. Shift to alower gear when you go down a steep orlong hill.

• Know how to go uphill. Drive in the highestgear possible.

• Stay in your own lane when driving ontwo-lane roads in hills or mountains. Do notswing wide or cut across the center of theroad. Drive at speeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.There could be something in your lane,like a stalled car or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountainsthat warn of special problems. Examples arelong grades, passing or no-passing zones,a falling rocks area, or winding roads. Be alertto these and take appropriate action.

289

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your trunk.

Also see Tires on page 374.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight,a red cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, a pieceof old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to helpprovide traction. Be sure you properly secure theseitems in your vehicle.

290

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

If you have a traction system, it will improve yourability to accelerate when driving on a slipperyroad. Even though your vehicle has a tractionsystem, you will want to slow down and adjust yourdriving to the road conditions. Under certainconditions, you may want to turn the tractionsystem off, such as when driving through deepsnow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehiclemotion at lower speeds. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 268, Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 270, or StabiliTrak®

System on page 271.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too.If you do have ABS, see Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS) on page 265.

291

ABS improves your vehicle’s stability when youmake a hard stop on a slippery road. Whether youhave ABS or not, you will want to begin stoppingsooner than you would on dry pavement. WithoutABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up onthe brakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterfollowing distance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanketaround you. If you do not have blanketsor extra clothing, make body insulatorsfrom newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap aroundyourself or tuck under your clothing tokeep warm.

292

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine as long as you must. This savesfuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

293

You will need a well-charged battery to restartthe vehicle, and possibly for signaling later onwith your headlamps. Let the heater run fora while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat.Start the engine again and repeat this onlywhen you feel really uncomfortable from the cold.But do it as little as possible. Preserve the fuelas long as you can. To help keep warm, youcan get out of the vehicle and do some fairlyvigorous exercises every half hour or so untilhelp comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

If your vehicle has a traction system, the tractionsystem can often help to free a stuck vehicle.See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 268,Enhanced Traction System (ETS) on page 270,or StabiliTrak® System on page 271. If thestuck condition is too severe for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn the traction systemoff and use the rocking method.

294

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you or otherscould be injured. And, the transaxle orother parts of the vehicle can overheat.That could cause an engine compartmentfire or other damage. When you are stuck,spin the wheels as little as possible. Do notspin the wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) asshown on the speedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 295.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 393.

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right to clearthe area around the front wheels. Turn off anytraction or stability system. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 268, Enhanced TractionSystem (ETS) on page 270, or StabiliTrak® Systemon page 271. Then shift back and forth betweenREVERSE (R) and a forward gear, or with amanual transmission, between FIRST (1)or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning thewheels as little as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears. Release theaccelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightlyon the accelerator pedal when the transmissionis in gear. By slowly spinning the wheels inthe forward and reverse directions, you will causea rocking motion that could free your vehicle.If that does not get your vehicle out after a fewtries, it might need to be towed out. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 302.

295

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weightyour vehicle can carry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight and includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo and all nonfactory-installedoptions. Two labels on your vehicle show howmuch weight it may properly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label and the Certificationlabel.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).

Label Example

296

The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C) andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation seeTires on page 374 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 383.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX pounds” on yourvehicle placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX pounds.

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

297

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 306 for important informationon towing a trailer, towing safety rules,and trailering tips.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) × 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

298




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 2 Example 3

299

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label, found on therear edge of the driver’s door, tells you thegross weight capacity of your vehicle, called theGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWRincludes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants,fuel and cargo. Never exceed the GVWR foryour vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

300

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anythingelse — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes.If you have to stop or turn quickly, or if there isa crash, they will keep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the trunk or rear area ofyour vehicle. In a trunk, put them asfar forward as you can. Try to spreadthe weight evenly. If you havefold-down rear seats, you will find fouranchors on the back wall of yourtrunk. You can use these anchors totie down lighter loads. They are notstrong enough for heavy things,however, so put them as far forwardas you can in the trunk or rear area.



• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

301

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 460.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behind amotorhome), see “Recreational Vehicle Towing”following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See “DinghyTowing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 286.

302

Dinghy TowingIf you have the 3.9L V6 engine with the four-speedautomatic transaxle, your vehicle cannot bedinghy towed.

If your vehicle does not have the 3.9L V6 enginewith a four-speed automatic transaxle, it canbe dinghy towed. When dinghy towing yourvehicle, the vehicle should be run at the beginningof each day and at each RV fuel stop for aboutfive minutes. This will ensure proper lubrication oftransmission components.

For vehicles that can be dinghy towed with all fourwheels on the ground, follow these steps:

1. Position the vehicle to tow and then secure it.

2. Turn the ignition to OFF.

3. Set the parking brake.

303

4. To prevent your battery from draining whilethe vehicle is being towed, remove thefollowing fuse from the instrument panel fuseblock: (IGN SENSOR). See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block on page 419 for moreinformation.

5. Turn the ignition to ACC.

6. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) whiletowing your vehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towingyour vehicle. Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear

could damage it. Also, repairs would notbe covered by the warranty. Never have yourvehicle towed from the rear.

304

Dolly TowingTo tow your vehicle with two wheels on theground and a dolly, do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. If you have an automatic transaxle, shift thetransaxle to PARK (P). If you have a manualtransaxle, shift the vehicle to SECOND (2).

3. Set the parking brake and then removethe key.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designedfor towing.

5. Release the parking brake.

305

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if you havefollowed all the steps in this section. Askyour dealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe trailering capacity of your vehicle, you shouldread the information in “Weight of the Trailer”that appears later in this section. Trailering isdifferent than just driving your vehicle by itself.

Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That is the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. What is more, thetrailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

306

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you will be driving.A good source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicleis driven. Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps your engine and other partsof your vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Do not drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg).But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig.For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have on yourvehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

307

When towing a trailer on long uphill grades andthe outside temperature is above 85°F (29°C),reduce your vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) toavoid overheating the engine cooling system.

You can ask your dealer for additional traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at:

Pontiac-GMC Customer AssistanceP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, write to:General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, 163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. If youhave a lot of options, equipment, passengersor cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight your vehicle can carry, which will alsoreduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.

And if you tow a trailer, you must include thetongue load in the GVW because your vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. See Loading YourVehicle on page 296 for more informationabout your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.

If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailertongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent ofthe total loaded trailer weight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

308

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You will find thesenumbers on the Tire-Loading Information label atthe rear edge of the driver’s door or see LoadingYour Vehicle on page 296. Then be sure youdo not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,including the weight of the trailer tongue.

HitchesIt is important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need the righthitch. Here are some rules to follow:• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not

intended for hitches. Do not attach rentalhitches or other bumper-type hitches to it.Use only a frame-mounted hitch that does notattach to the bumper.

• Will you have to make any holes in the body ofyour vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?If you do, then be sure to seal the holes laterwhen you remove the hitch. If you do not sealthem, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from yourexhaust can get into your vehicle. See EngineExhaust on page 142. Dirt and water can, too.

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes?

Be sure to read and follow the instructions forthe trailer brakes so you will be able to install,adjust and maintain them properly. And becauseyou may have anti-lock brakes, do not try totap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,both systems will not work well, or at all.

309

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you will want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains, electrical connector,lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer haselectric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer movingand then apply the trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working. This lets youcheck your electrical connection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou will need more passing distance up aheadwhen you are towing a trailer. And, because you’rea good deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you can returnto your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel with onehand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, just movethat hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,move your hand to the right. Always back up slowlyand, if possible, have someone guide you.

Making TurnsNotice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.

When you are turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailer willnot strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

310

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, thetrailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers youare about to turn, change lanes or stop.

When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It is important to check occasionallyto be sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

Driving On GradesWhen towing a trailer on long uphill grades andthe outside temperature is above 85°F (29°C),reduce your vehicle speed to 45 mph (72 km/h) toavoid overheating the engine cooling system.

Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before youstart down a long or steep downgrade. If you donot shift down, you might have to use your brakesso much that they would get hot and no longerwork well.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park yourvehicle, with a trailer attached, on a hill.If something goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured,and both your vehicle and the trailer canbe damaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here is how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift intoPARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or intogear for a manual transaxle. When parkinguphill, turn your wheels away from the curb.When parking downhill, turn your wheelsinto the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under thetrailer wheels.

311

3. When the chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorbthe load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P).

5. Release the regular brakes.

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine,

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and storethe chocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou are pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (do not overfill), engineoil, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, andthe Index will help you find them quickly. If youare trailering, it is a good idea to review thisinformation before you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 347.

312

Service ........................................................ 316Accessories and Modifications ................... 316California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 317Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 317Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 318Fuel ............................................................. 318

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 318Gasoline Specifications .............................. 318California Fuel ........................................... 318Additives ................................................... 319Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 319Filling the Tank ......................................... 320Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 322

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 322Hood Release ........................................... 323Engine Compartment Overview .................. 324Engine Oil ................................................. 331Engine Oil Life System .............................. 334Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 336

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(2.4L L4 and 3.5L V6 Engines) .............. 337

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.6L V6 Engine) .................................... 338

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.9L V6 Engine) .................................... 340

Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 343Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 343Engine Coolant .......................................... 344Pressure Cap ............................................ 347Engine Overheating ................................... 347Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ..................................... 349Cooling System ......................................... 350Power Steering Fluid ................................. 354Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 355Brakes ...................................................... 357Battery ...................................................... 360Jump Starting ............................................ 361

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

313

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 366Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 366Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ............. 366Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) (Sedan) ................... 368Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL)

(Retractable Hardtop and Coupe) ............. 368Taillamps, Turn Sinal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps (Sedan) ... 369Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps (Coupe) ... 370Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps(Retractable Hardtop) ............................. 371

License Plate Lamp ................................... 372Replacement Bulbs ................................... 372

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 373

Tires ............................................................ 374Winter Tires .............................................. 375Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 376Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 380Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 383High-Speed Operation ............................... 385Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 386When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 387Buying New Tires ...................................... 388Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 389Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 390Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 391Wheel Replacement .................................. 392Tire Chains ............................................... 393If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 394Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 394Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 396Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire ....................................... 398Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 404Compact Spare Tire .................................. 407


314

Appearance Care ........................................ 408Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 408Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 409Leather ...................................................... 410Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 411Care of Safety Belts .................................. 411Weatherstrips ............................................ 411Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 412Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 412Finish Care ............................................... 412Windshield and Wiper Blades .................... 413Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 414Tires ......................................................... 414Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 415Finish Damage .......................................... 415Underbody Maintenance ............................ 415Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 416Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 416

Vehicle Identification .................................. 417Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 417Service Parts Identification Label ............... 417

Electrical System ........................................ 418Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 418Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 418Power Windows and Other

Power Options ....................................... 418Fuses ........................................................ 419Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 419Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 422Rear Compartment Fuse Block .................. 425

Capacities and Specifications .................... 428


315

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. Youwill get genuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control and stabilitycontrol. Some of these accessories may evencause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complementand function with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer/retailer can accessorize yourvehicle using genuine GM Accessories. Whenyou go to your GM dealer/retailer and ask forGM Accessories, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM Accessories.

316

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attemptany vehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you should use the proper service manual. Ittells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order the properservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 471.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 95.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Maintenance Recordon page 449.

317

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep the engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you might notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible.If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolinesmay contain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives onpage 319 for additional information.

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. See theunderhood emission control label. If this fuel is notavailable in states adopting California emissionsstandards, your vehicle will operate satisfactorily onfuels meeting federal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on and yourvehicle may fail a smog-check test. See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 205. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered by yourwarranty.

318

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in theUnited States are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to yourfuel. However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such asethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolinesmay be available in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed for thosefuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It can corrode metal partsin the fuel system and also damage plastic andrubber parts. That damage would not becovered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected.The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.If this occurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outside theUnited States or Canada, the proper fuel might behard to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any otherfuel not recommended in the previous text on fuel.Costly repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

319

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. The fuel cap has a springin it; if the cap is released too soon, it will springback to the right.

While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap fromthe hook on the fuel door.

320

{CAUTION:

Fuel can spray out on you if you open thefuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel andthen something ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank, and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 412.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwiseuntil it clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.This would let fuel evaporate into the atmosphere.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 205.

The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayedon the Driver Information Center (DIC) if thefuel cap is not properly installed. See DICWarnings and Messages on page 214 formore information.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling,do not remove the nozzle. Shut off theflow of fuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sureto get the right type. Your dealer/retailercan get one for you. If you get the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may cause yourmalfunction indicator lamp to light andmay damage your fuel tank and emissionssystem. See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 205.

321

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container whileit is in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact withthe inside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping gasoline.

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

322

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the handle withthis symbol on it.It is located underthe instrument panelon the driver’s sideof the vehicle.

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pushthe secondary hood release lever to the right.

3. Lift the hood, release the hood prop rod fromits retainer, and put the hood prop into theslot in the hood marked with an arrow.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the fillercaps are on properly. Then lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop. Remove the hoodprop from the slot in the hood and return the propto its retainer. Then let the hood down andclose it firmly.

323

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood on the 2.4L L4 engine, this is what you see:

324

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 336.

B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 331.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See“Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil onpage 331.

D. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 344.

E. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 347.

F. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 357.

G. Battery. See Battery on page 360.H. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See

“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 355.

I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 422.

325

When you open the hood on the 3.5L V6 engine, this is what you see:

326


B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 354.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 331.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 331.

E. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 344.

F. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 347.G. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake

Fluid” under Brakes on page 357.H. Battery. See Battery on page 360.I. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 422.J. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See


327


328


B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 354.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 331.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 331.

E. Electric Engine Cooling Fans (Out of View).See Cooling System on page 350.

F. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 344.

G. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 347.H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake

Fluid” under Brakes on page 357.

I. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick. See“Checking the Fluid Level” under AutomaticTransaxle Fluid (2.4L L4 and 3.5L V6 Engines)on page 337 or Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.6L V6 Engine) on page 338 or AutomaticTransaxle Fluid (3.9L V6 Engine) on page 340.

J. Battery. See Battery on page 360.K. Underhood Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 422.L. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See


329


330


B. Engine Coolant Bleed Valve.C. Power Steering Fluid. See Power Steering

Fluid on page 354.D. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (Out of

View). See “Checking the Fluid Level” underAutomatic Transaxle Fluid (2.4L L4 and 3.5L V6Engines) on page 337 or Automatic TransaxleFluid (3.6L V6 Engine) on page 338 orAutomatic Transaxle Fluid (3.9L V6 Engine) onpage 340.

E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 331.

F. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 331.

G. Engine Coolant Surge Tank. See EngineCoolant on page 344.

H. Pressure Cap. See Pressure Cap on page 347.I. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake

Fluid” under Brakes on page 357.J. Battery. See Battery on page 360.

K. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 355.

L. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See EngineCompartment Fuse Block on page 422.

Engine Oil

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 324for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

331

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at thetip of the dipstick, you need to add at leastone quart/liter of oil. But you must use the right kind.

This section explains what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 428.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets above theupper mark that shows the proper operatingrange, the engine could be damaged.

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 324 for thelocation of the engineoil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range.Push the dipstick all the way back in whenyou are through.

L4 Engine

V6 Engine

332

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for three things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

• Oils meeting theserequirements shouldhave the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. Thissymbol indicatesthat the oil has beencertified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol.Failure to use the recommended oil canresult in engine damage not covered byyour warranty.

333

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine OilYour vehicle has a computer system that lets youknow when to change the engine oil and filter.This is based on engine revolutions and enginetemperature, and not on mileage. Based on

driving conditions, the mileage at which an oilchange will be indicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to work properly, you mustreset the system every time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculated that oil life hasbeen diminished, it will indicate that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message willcome on. See DIC Warnings and Messages onpage 214. Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possiblethat, if you are driving under the best conditions, theoil life system might not indicate that an oil changeis necessary for over a year. However, the engineoil and filter must be changed at least once a yearand at this time the system must be reset. Yourdealer/retailer has trained service people who willperform this work using genuine parts and reset thesystem. It is also important to check the oil regularlyand keep it at the proper level.

If the system is ever reset accidentally, you mustchange the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) sinceyour last oil change. Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

334

How to Reset the Engine Oil LifeSystemThe Engine Oil Life System calculates when tochange the engine oil and filter based on vehicleuse. Whenever the oil is changed, reset thesystem so it can calculate when the next oilchange is required. If a situation occurs whereyou change the oil prior to a CHANGE OIL SOONmessage being turned on, reset the system.

After changing the engine oil and filter, the systemmust be reset. To reset the oil life system:

1. With the CHANGE OIL SOON messagedisplayed, press any of the three DICbuttons to clear the CHANGE OIL SOONmessage. See DIC Warnings and Messageson page 214.

2. Display OIL LIFE RESET on the DIC.

3. Press and hold the ENTER button for at leastone second. An ACKNOWLEDGED displaymessage will appear for three seconds or untilthe next button is pressed. This will tell youthe system has been reset. See DIC VehiclePersonalization on page 217.

4. Turn the ignition to OFF.

If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes backon when you start your vehicle, the engine oillife system has not reset. Repeat the procedure.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that canbe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin forvery long. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer/retailer, a service station,or a local recycling center for help.

335

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 324for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterInspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance IIintervals and replace it at the first oil changeafter each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval.

See Scheduled Maintenance on page 434 formore information. If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at each engine oilchange.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Remove the screws that hold the cover on.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

3. Lift off the cover.

4. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall thecover and reconnect the electrical connector.

336

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not thereand the engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(2.4L L4 and 3.5L V6 Engines)It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluidlevel. A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason forfluid loss. If a leak occurs, take your vehicle tothe dealer and have it repaired as soon aspossible.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listedin Additional Required Services on page 437,and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 445.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle,and the damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 445.

337

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.6L V6 Engine)

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid at the intervals listed in AdditionalRequired Services on page 437, and be sure touse the transaxle fluid listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 445.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult,you may choose to have this done at the retailerservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid candamage the transaxle. Too much can meanthat some of the fluid could come out andfall on hot engine or exhaust system parts,starting a fire. Too little fluid could causethe transaxle to overheat. Be sure to get anaccurate reading if you check the transaxlefluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid shouldbe at normal operating temperature, which is180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

338

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle hasthis symbol on it,and is located nearthe front of the enginecompartment.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 324for more information on location.

1. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Reinstall it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be within thecross hatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way.

339

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 445.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatched area on the dipstick.

1. Remove the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan a half pint (0.24 L). Do not overfill.


3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid(3.9L V6 Engine)

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check the automatic transaxle fluidlevel is when the engine oil is changed.

Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listedin Additional Required Services on page 437,and be sure to use the transaxle fluid listedin Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 445.

How to Check AutomaticTransaxle FluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

340

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above90°F (32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid shouldbe at normal operating temperature, whichis 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare the vehicle as follows:

1. Park the vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear, pausing forabout three seconds in each one. Then,position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The transaxle fluiddipstick handle hasthis symbol on it,and is located nearthe rear of the enginecompartment.

341


1. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanrag or paper towel.

2. Reinstall it back in all the way, waitthree seconds and then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be within thecrosshatched area.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way.

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinewhat kind of transaxle fluid to use. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 445.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

1. Remove the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan a half pint (0.24 L). Do not overfill.


3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained,reinstall the dipstick back in all the way.

342

Manual Transaxle FluidIt is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level.A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluidloss. If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealerand have it repaired as soon as possible. SeeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 445for the proper fluid to use.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoiris filled with hydraulic fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check the fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

When to Check and What to Use

Refer to theMaintenance Scheduleto determine how oftenyou should check thefluid level in your mastercylinder reservoir and forthe proper fluid.

See Owner Checks and Services on page 440and Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 445.

How to Check and Add FluidYou do not need to check the fluid level unlessyou suspect a clutch problem. To check thefluid level, take the cap off. If the fluid reachesthe step inside the reservoir, the fluid levelis correct. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 324 for more information on location.

343

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in your vehicle is filled withDEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant isdesigned to remain in your vehicle for five yearsor 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whicheveroccurs first, if you add only DEX-COOL®

extended life coolant.

The following explains the cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If there isa problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 347.

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to−34°F (−37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant may require changing sooner,at the first maintenance service after each30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Always useDEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in yourvehicle.

344

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water,or some other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

If you have to add coolant more than four times ayear, have your dealer/retailer check the coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system,you could damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listedin this manual for the cooling system.See Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 445 for more information.

345

Checking Coolant

The engine coolant surge tank is located in therear of the engine compartment. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 324 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

Turning the surge tank pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. Never turn the surgetank pressure cap — even a little — whenthe engine and radiator are hot.

The vehicle must be on a level surface. Whenthe engine is cold, the coolant level should be atthe FULL COLD mark or slightly higher.

346

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the surge tank,but only when the engine is cool. If the surge tankis empty, a special fill procedure is necessary.See Engine Overheating on page 347 and CoolingSystem on page 350.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it ishand-tight and fully seated.

Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.


Engine OverheatingThere is an engine coolant temperature gage onyour vehicle’s instrument panel. See EngineCoolant Temperature Gage on page 204.

347

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Turnit off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when the vehiclesengine is overheated, the liquids in it cancatch fire. You or others could be badlyburned. Stop your engine if it overheats,and get out of the vehicle until the engineis cool.

See Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating Mode on page 349 forinformation on driving to a safe place in anemergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty. SeeOverheated Engine Protection Operating Modeon page 349 for information on driving to asafe place in an emergency.

If No Steam Is Coming From YourEngineIf you get an engine overheat warning, but seeor hear no steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the engine can geta little too hot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

348

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe todo so, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P)or NEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fanspeed and open the windows as necessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning,you can drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does notcome back on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and parkyour vehicle right away.

If there is still no sign of steam, idle the enginefor three minutes while you are parked. If you stillhave the warning, turn off the engine and geteveryone out of the vehicle until it cools down.

You might decide not to lift the hood but toget service help right away.

Overheated Engine ProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating mode lets your vehiclebe driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.If an overheated engine condition exists, anoverheat protection mode which alternates firinggroups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.In this mode, there is a significant loss in powerand engine performance. The temperature gageindicates an overheat condition exists. Drivingextended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode should be avoided.

Notice: After driving in the overheated engineprotection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to cool beforeattempting any repair. The engine oil willbe severely degraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil and reset the oillife system. See Engine Oil on page 331.

349

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, this iswhat you see:

A. Engine Cooling FansB. Engine Coolant Surge TankC. Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above theFULL COLD mark on the coolant surge tank.If it is not, you may have a leak at the pressurecap or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhere else inthe cooling system.

3.5L V6 Engine shown, 2.4L L4, 3.6L V6 and3.9L V6 Engines similar

350

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak.If you run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fansare running. If the engine is overheating, both fansshould be running. If they are not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL®

may cause premature engine, heater core,or radiator corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changing sooner,at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or 24 months,whichever occurs first. Any repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Alwaysuse DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant inyour vehicle.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantSurge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fillprocedure. Failure to follow this procedurecould cause your engine to overheat andbe severely damaged.

If you have not found a problem yet, check to seeif coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not at or above theFULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tank pressure cap,is cool before you do it. See Engine Coolant onpage 344 for more information.

351

If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, addcoolant as follows:

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the coolant surge tank pressurecap — even a little — they can come out athigh speed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait forthe cooling system and coolant surgetank pressure cap to cool if you everhave to turn the pressure cap.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolantand the proper coolant mixture.

352

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolanton hot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do notspill coolant on a hot engine.

1. Remove the coolant surge tank pressurecap when the cooling system, includingthe coolant surge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turnthe pressure cap slowly counterclockwiseabout two or two and one-half turns.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressure still left to bevented out the discharge hose.

2. Then keepturning the pressurecap slowly, andremove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the propermixture, to the FULL COLD mark. Waitabout five minutes, then check to see ifthe level is below the mark. If the level isbelow the FULL COLD mark, add additionalcoolant to bring the level up to the mark.Repeat this procedure until the level remainsconstant at the FULL COLD mark for atleast five minutes.

353

4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off,start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fans.By this time, the coolant level inside thecoolant surge tank might be lower. If thelevel is lower than the FULL COLD mark,add more of the proper mixture to the coolantsurge tank until the level reaches theFULL COLD mark.

5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure thepressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.

Power Steering Fluid

See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 324 forreservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidPower steering fluid is used in all vehicles withV6 engines. Vehicles with the 4-cylinder enginehave electric power steering and do not use powersteering fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless a leak is suspected in thesystem, or an unusual noise is heard. A fluidloss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

354

How to Check Power Steering FluidTo check the power steering fluid, do the following:

1. Turn the key off and let the enginecompartment cool down.

2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoirclean.

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with aclean rag.

4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.

5. Remove the cap again and look at thefluid level on the dipstick

The fluid level should be within the crosshatchedarea on the dipstick.

If the fluid is at or below the ADD mark on thedipstick, add just enough fluid to bring thelevel within the crosshatched area.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seeRecommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 445.Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use theproper fluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you are operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

355

Adding Washer FluidWhen the windshield washer fluid reservoir is low,a LOW WASHER FLUID message displays onthe Driver Information Center (DIC). See DICWarnings and Messages on page 214 for moreinformation.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the reservoir is full.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 324for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for fluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if it iscompletely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damagethe vehicle’s windshield washer systemand paint.

356

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The brake mastercylinder reservoir isfilled with DOT-3 brakefluid. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 324 for thelocation of the reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system. If it is, you should have thebrake system fixed, since a leak means thatsooner or later the brakes will not work well.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you addfluid when the linings are worn, then you will havetoo much fluid when you get new brake linings. Youshould add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,only when work is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, theBRAKE FLUID message in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) will come on. See DIC Warningsand Messages on page 214.

357

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 445.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thiswill help keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well.This could cause a crash. Always use theproper brake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 412.

Brake WearYour vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except whenyou are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

358

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can causea brake squeal when the brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not mean something iswrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities and Specificationson page 428.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal doesnot return to normal height, or if there is a rapidincrease in pedal travel. This could be a sign thatbrake service might be required.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you apply the brakes, with or withoutthe vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and workwell together if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and tested withtop-quality brake parts. When you replace parts ofthe braking system — for example, when the brakelinings wear down and you need new ones putin — be sure you get new approved replacementparts. If you do not, the brakes might not workproperly. For example, if someone puts in brakelinings that are wrong for your vehicle, thebalance between the front and rear brakescan change — for the worse. The brakingperformance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone putsin the wrong replacement brake parts.

359

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 324 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 361 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

360

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is nota 12-volt system with a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged. Only use vehicleswith 12-volt systems with negative grounds tojump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehiclesare not touching each other. If they are,it could cause a ground connection you donot want. You would not be able to startyour vehicle, and the bad grounding coulddamage the electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure.Put an automatic transaxle in PARK (P)or a manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

361

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplugunnecessary accessories plugged into thecigarette lighter or the accessory power outlet.Turn off the radio and all lamps that are notneeded. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries. And it could save the radio!

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.Find the positive (+) and negative (−)terminal locations on each vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview on page 324for more information on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to the batteryinstalled in your new vehicle. But if abattery has filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low, addwater to take care of that first. If you do not,explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that canburn you. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

362

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somethings you should know. Positive (+) will goto positive (+) or to a remote positive (+)terminal if the vehicle has one. Negative (−)will go to a heavy, unpainted metal enginepart or to a remote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−)or you will get a short that would damage thebattery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminalif the vehicle has one.

363

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative (−) terminal of the good battery.Use a remote negative (−) terminal if thevehicle has one.Do not let the other end touch anythinguntil the next step. The other end of thenegative (−) cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal on the vehicle with the deadbattery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.If the security light flashes, wait until the lightstops flashing.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries,it probably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connectedor removed in the wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damage the vehicle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Always connect and removethe jumper cables in the correct order, makingsure that the cables do not touch each otheror other metal.

364

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Jumper Cable Removal

365

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs,see Replacement Bulbs on page 372.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps

A. Front SidemarkerB. Front Turn

Signal/ParkingLamp

C. Low-BeamHeadlamp

D. High-BeamHeadlamp

366

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the two screws that secure theheadlamp assembly.

2. Loosen the front fascia by removing theplastic push pins along the top of the tie bar byprying under the fasteners with a tool.

3. Pull back the front fascia then pull theheadlamp assembly forward, out of thevehicle. You need to pry the headlampassembly away from the fender. This freesthe ball stud from its retainer in the fenderbracket.You might want someone to assist you withthe removal of the headlamp assemblyto avoid possible damage to the vehicle.

4. Remove the bulb access cover by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull out the bulb assembly.

6. Disconnect the bulb socket from the wiringharness for headlamps.For the front turn signal/parking or sidemarkerbulbs, unclip the bulb from the socket.

7. Install a new bulb.

8. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 to reinstall thebulb assembly and headlamp assembly.

367

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Sedan)To replace a center high-mounted stoplamp(CHMSL) bulb, do the following:

1. Open the trunk lid. See Trunk on page 114 formore information.

2. Locate the center high-mounted stoplamp(CHMSL) on the inside of the trunk lid.

3. Unclip the wiring harness by using a tool todisengage the connector.

4. Remove the cover by pressing the tabs ateither end with a tool.

5. Remove the bulb by turning itcounterclockwise.


7. Reverse Steps 3 through 5 to reinstall thebulb assembly.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL) (Retractable Hardtopand Coupe)If your vehicle has this component and it needsreplacement, it is recommended that it be replacedas a unit by your dealer/retailer.

368

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps (Sedan)

A. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn SignalB. Sidemarker LampC. Back-up LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 114

for more information.2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle

has one.

3. Remove the wing nuts holding the trunk trim.

4. Remove the two nuts, which hold the taillampassembly, from inside the vehicle.

5. Remove the taillamp assembly.

6. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise toremove.

7. Pull the bulb from the socket.


9. Reverse Steps 2 through 7 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.

369

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps andBack-up Lamps (Coupe)

A. Sidemarker LampB. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal LampC. Back-up LampTo replace one of these bulbs, do the following:1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 114

for more information.2. Remove the convenience net, if the vehicle

has one.

3. Remove the two wing nuts from the trunk trimto expose the hex nuts.

4. Remove the three hex nuts retaining thetaillamp assembly.

5. Pull the assembly off to the side to release itfrom the rear of the vehicle.


7. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.8. Install a new bulb.9. Reverse Steps 3 through 5 to reinstall the

taillamp assembly.

370

Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps(Retractable Hardtop)

A. Sidemarker LampB. Stoplamp/Taillamp/Turn Signal LampC. Back-up Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 114for more information.

2. Locate the three rubber covers in the trunk trim,near the taillamp assembly and remove them.

3. Remove the two nuts and one bolt retainingthe taillamp assembly.

4. Pull off the assembly to the side to release itfrom the vehicle.


6. Pull the bulb from the bulb socket.


8. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall thetaillamp assembly.

371

License Plate LampTo replace the license plate lamp bulb, do thefollowing:

1. Remove the two screws holding the licenseplate lamp assembly to the fascia.

2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forwardthrough the fascia opening.

3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull the bulb straight out of the socket.

4. Install the new bulb.5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the

lamp assembly.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberCoupe and RetractableHardtop 921

Sedan 3057KCenter High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) 912***

Front Parking and TurnSignal Lamp 3157KX

Front/Rear Sidemarker Lamp 194License Plate Lamp 168Headlamps

High-Beam Lamp H9Low-Beam Lamp H11

Stoplamp, Taillamp andTurn Signal Lamp 3057K*

Sidemarker, Stoplamp, Taillampand Turn Signal Lamp 3157K**

*Coupe and Sedan only**Retractable Hardtop only***Sedan Only

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer/retailer.

372

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected forwear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenanceon page 434 for more information on wiper bladeinspection.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. Here is how toremove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector awayfrom the windshield.

2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side ofthe blade, and turn the blade assembly awayfrom the arm connector.

3. Install the new blade onto the arm connectorand make sure the grooved areas are fully setin the locked position.

For the proper type and size, see NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 446.

373

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included withyour vehicle.

{CAUTION:

• Poorly maintained and improperlyused tires are dangerous.

• Overloading your tires can causeoverheating as a result of too muchfriction. You could have an air-out anda serious accident. See Loading YourVehicle on page 296.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour tires are cold. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 383.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifyour tread is badly worn, or if your tireshave been damaged, replace them.

See High-Speed Operation on page 385 forinflation pressure adjustment for highspeed driving.

374

Low-Profile Performance TireIf your vehicle has P225/50R18 or P225/50R17size tires, they are classified as low-profileperformance tires. These tires are designed forvery responsive driving on wet or dry pavement.You may also notice more road noise withlow-profile performance tires and that theytend to wear faster.

Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires,they are more susceptible to damage from roadhazards or curb impact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheel assembly damage canoccur when coming into contact with roadhazards like, potholes, or sharp edged objects,or when sliding into a curb. Your GM warrantydoes not cover this type of damage. Keep tiresset to the correct inflation pressure and, whenpossible avoid contact with curbs, potholes,and other road hazards.

Winter TiresIf your vehicle has P225/50R18 size tires, they areclassified as low-profile performance tires. Thesetires are designed for very responsive driving onwet or dry pavement. If you expect to drive on snowor ice covered roads often, you may want to getwinter tires for your vehicle. The low-profileperformance tires may not offer the traction youwould like or the same level of performance aswinter tires on snow or ice covered roads.

Winter tires, in general, are designed for increasedtraction on snow and ice covered roads. With wintertires, there may be decreased dry road traction,increased road noise and shorter tire tread life.After switching to winter tires, be alert for changesin vehicle handling and braking.

See your retailer for details regarding winter tireavailability and proper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 388.

375

If you choose to use winter tires:

• Use tires of the same brand and tread type onall four wheel positions.

• Use only radial ply tires of the same size, loadrange, and speed rating as your originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speed rating as youroriginal equipment tires may not be available for H,V, W and ZR speed rated tires. If you choosewinter tires with a lower speed rating, neverexceed the tire’s maximum speed capability.

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and a compact spare tiresidewall. (A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of

letters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example

376

(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):The Department of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): Theletters and numbers following DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although only one side may havethe date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under thetread.

(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required to gradetires based on three performance factors:treadwear, traction, and temperature resistance.For more information see Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 390.

(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

377

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.If your vehicle has a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire on page 407 andIf a Tire Goes Flat on page 394.

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and underthe tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT (Department ofTransportation) code is the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturerand plant code, tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN is molded onto both sidesof the tire, although only one side may have thedate of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tireor compact spare tire should be inflated to60 psi (420 kPa). For more information on tirepressure and inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 383.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

Compact Spare Tire Example

378

(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Original equipment tires designedto GM’s specific tire performance criteria havea TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed allfederal safety guidelines.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger vehicle tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineeredto standards set by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 60, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 60 percent as high asit is wide.

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire.The letter R means radial ply construction;the letter D means diagonal or bias plyconstruction; and the letter B meansbelted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and speed rating of thetire. The load index represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The load indexcan range from 1 to 279. The speed rating isthe maximum speed a tire is certified to carrya load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

379

Tire Terminology and Definitions

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories are, automatic transmission,power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread.Cords may be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 383.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer, production plant,brand, and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

380

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carryingcapacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 296.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,brand, and/or model name molding that ishigher or deeper than the same moldingson the other sidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard.See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 383and Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

381

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread ofa tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of treadremains. See When It Is Time for New Tireson page 387.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear.

Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 390.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load onan individual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attachedto a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacityweight and the original equipment tire sizeand recommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and Loading Information Label”under Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

382

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right.It is not. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attachedto the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tires whenthey are cold. The recommended cold tire inflationpressure, shown on the label, is the minimumamount of air pressure needed to support yourvehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an exampleof the Tire and Loading Information label,see Loading Your Vehicle on page 296. How youload your vehicle affects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load your vehicle with moreweight than it was designed to carry.

383

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 407.

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to checktire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them.Radial tires may look properly inflated even whenthey are under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reachthe recommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

384

High-Speed Operation

{CAUTION:

Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h)or higher, puts an additional strain on tires.Sustained high-speed driving causesexcessive heat build up and can causesudden tire failure. You could have a crashand you or others could be killed. Somehigh-speed rated tires require inflationpressure adjustment for high speedoperation. When speed limits and roadconditions are such that a vehicle can



be driven at high speeds, make sure thetires are rated for high speed operation,in excellent condition, and set to thecorrect cold tire inflation pressure forthe vehicle load.

Set the cold tire inflation pressure to35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and rear tires, whenoperating your vehicle at high-speed conditions.When you end high-speed driving return thetires to the cold inflation pressure shown on theTire and Loading Information label. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 296 and Inflation - TirePressure on page 383.

385

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 387and Wheel Replacement on page 392 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. Thefirst rotation is the most important. See ScheduledMaintenance on page 434.

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures as shown on theTire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 428.

386

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 394.

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when it istime for new tires is tocheck the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less oftread remaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:• You can see the indicators at three or more

places around the tire.• You can see cord or fabric showing through

the tire’s rubber.• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or

snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage

that cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

387

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. The original equipment tires installedon your vehicle, when it was new, were designed tomeet General Motors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC spec) system rating. If you needreplacement tires, GM strongly recommends thatyou get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. Thisway, your vehicle will continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the same performance and vehiclesafety, during normal use, as the original tires.

GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over adozen critical specifications that impact the overallperformance of your vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride and handling, tractioncontrol, and tire pressure monitoring performance.GM’s TPC Spec number is molded onto the tire’ssidewall by the tire manufacturer. If the tires havean all-season tread design, the TPC spec numberwill be followed by an MS for mud and snow.See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 376 foradditional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle.See Compact Spare Tire on page 407.

388

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with thosethat do not have a TPC Spec number, make surethey are the same size, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial and bias-belted tires)as your vehicle’s original tires.

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation label and its location on your vehicle.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires, thismay affect the way your vehicle performs, includingits braking, ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally,if your vehicle has electronic systems such as,anti-lock brakes, traction control, and electronicstability control, the performance of these systemscan be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tiresnot recommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by aGM certified technician.

389

See Buying New Tires on page 388 andAccessories and Modifications on page 316 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicableon the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the United States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diametersof 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements and additionalGeneral Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)standards.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (1.5) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

390

Traction – AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature – A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,or excessive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regular basis. However,if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehiclepulling to one side or the other, the alignment mayneed to be checked. If you notice your vehiclevibrating when driving on a smooth road, your tiresand wheels may need to be rebalanced. See yourdealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.

391

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nutsshould be replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum wheels, which cansometimes be repaired). See your dealer/retailerif any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheelyou need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collisionin which you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicleground clearance, and tire or tire chainclearance to the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 394 for moreinformation.

392

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven.It could fail suddenly and cause a crash.If you have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

{CAUTION:

Do not use tire chains, there is notenough clearance.

Tire chains used on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance can causedamage to the brakes, suspension or



other vehicle parts. The area damaged bythe tire chains could cause you to losecontrol of your vehicle and you or othersmay be injured in a crash.

Use another type of traction deviceonly if its manufacturer recommendsit for use on your vehicle and tire sizecombination and road conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s instructions. To helpavoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly,re-adjust or remove the device if iscontacting your vehicle, and do notspin your wheels.

If you do find traction devices that will fit,install them on the front tires.

393

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is muchmore likely to leak out slowly. But if you should everhave a blowout, here are a few tips about what toexpect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Takeyour foot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop wellout of the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Get the vehicle under control by steering theway you want the vehicle to go. It may be verybumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it todo maintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use thejacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turnon your vehicle’s hazard warning flashers.See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 168 formore information.

394

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.

To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire, on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you next how touse the jack and change a tire.

395

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe equipment you will need is located inthe trunk.

1. If you have a retractable hardtop model,make sure the hardtop is in the up position.

2. Open the trunk. See Trunk on page 114 formore information.

3. If you have a sedan or coupe model, lift thehandle on the spare tire cover.If you have a retractable hardtop model,unlatch the trunk cargo cover so that it is inthe open position. Then remove the cover fromthe spare tire. 4. Turn the wing nut counterclockwise and

remove it. Then remove the compactspare tire. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 407 for more information.

5. Remove the wing nut holding the jackin place.

6. Remove the extension bolt that is clipped tothe jack. You will need this later to store theflat tire.

7. Remove the jack and wheel wrench fromthe trunk.

396

The tools you will be using include the wheelwrench (A) and jack (B).

1. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise toloosen the wheel wrench.

2. Unhook the wheel wrench from the jack.

397

3. Extend the handle on the wheel wrench bypressing the button with your index fingerand pulling on the end of the wrench.You must do this before using the wheelwrench.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. It is recommended a safety check is done

before preceding. See Changing a Flat Tireon page 394 for more information.

2. If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcapthat has plastic wheel nut caps, then loosenthe plastic nut caps. You may need to use thewheel wrench to loosen them. Do not pryoff wheel covers or center caps thathave plastic wheel nut caps.

3. Remove the wheel cover or center cap fromthe wheel to locate the wheel nuts.If your vehicle has a wheel cover or hubcapwithout plastic wheel nut caps, gently pry onthe edge of the plastic wheel trim to remove itfrom the wheel to find the wheel nuts.Store the wheel cover in the trunk until the flatis repaired or replaced.

398

4. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

5. Position the lift head at the jack locationnearest the flat tire. Make sure all of thejack lift head is touching the jacking flangeunder the body. Do not place the jack under abody panel. The lower body panel has anarrow to aid in locating the jacking location.

399

6. Put the compact spare tire near the flat tirebeing changed.

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

7. Raise the vehicle by turning the wheel wrenchclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit underneaththe wheel well.

400

8. Remove all of thewheel nuts.

9. Remove the flat tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make the wheelnuts become loose after time. The wheelcould come off and cause an accident.



When changing a wheel, remove any rustor dirt from the places where the wheelattaches to the vehicle. In an emergency,a cloth or a paper towel can be used to dothis; but be sure to use a scraper or wirebrush later, if needed, to get all the rust ordirt off.

10. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces, andspare wheel.

401

11. Install the compact spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.Because the nuts might come loose. Thevehicle’s wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

12. Put the wheel nuts back on with the roundedend of the nuts toward the wheel. Tighteneach nut by hand until the wheel is heldagainst the hub. 13. Lower the vehicle by turning the wheel

wrench counterclockwise. Lower the jackcompletely.

402

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 428for wheel nut torque specification.

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tightenthe wheel nuts in the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification. See Capacitiesand Specifications on page 428 for the wheelnut torque specification.

14. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequence,as shown, withthe wheel wrench.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on yourvehicle’s compact spare. If you try to put awheel cover on the compact spare, the coveror the spare could be damaged.

Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compactspare tire. It will not fit.

403

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

All Models (Except GTP andRetractable Hardtop)

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

To store the flat tire and jack in the compact sparetire compartment, do the following:


2. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellowsleeve) from the jack and remove thecenter cap from the wheel.

3. Place the jack over the bolt (A) on the floor,making sure it contacts the bolt as shown,and thread the jack retainer nut until itcontacts the jack.

4. With the valve stem up, place the tire on thecompartment floor with the rear of the tirebeneath the trim panel. The tire may not laycompletely flat.

5. Line up a wheel nut hole with the bolt orwheel center.

404

6. With the yellow cap in place to prevent thewheel from being scratched, screw the boltextension onto the bolt through the wheelnut hole.

7. Remove the yellow cap from the boltextension.

8. Secure the tire and wheel with the largerwing nut.

A. CoverB. Wing NutC. Bolt ExtensionD. Spare Tire

E. NutF. JackG. Bolt

The compact spare is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 407. See the storage instructions label toreplace your compact spare properly into yourtrunk.

GTP and Retractable Hardtop ModelsTo store the flat tire and jack in the compact sparetire compartment, do the following:

1. Make sure the retractable hardtop is in the upposition.


3. If you have a retractable hardtop model,unlatch the trunk cargo cover so that it isin the open position.

4. Remove the bolt extension (in the yellowsleeve) from the jack and remove thecenter cap from the wheel.

405

5. Place the jack over the bolt (B) on the floor,making sure it contacts the bolt as shown.

6. Place the extension bolt (A) onto the bolt (B).

7. Thread the jack retainer nut (C) until it isat or near the end of the threads.

8. Reach under the wheel and lift the extensionbolt so that the threaded end of the boltpasses through the center hole of the wheel.

9. Remove the yellow cap.

10. Secure the tire and wheel with the largerwing nut.

11. Replace the cover.

A. RetainerB. CoverC. Flat Tire (Valve

Stem Up)D. Nut

E. Bolt ExtensionF. BracketG. Jack and Wheel

WrenchH. Bolt

406

The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.Replace the compact spare tire with a full-size tireas soon as you can. See Compact Spare Tire onpage 407 See the storage instructions label toreplace your compact spare properly into yourtrunk.

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen the vehicle was new, it can lose air aftera time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on the vehicle,stop as soon as possible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is madeto perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), soyou can finish your trip and have the full-size tirerepaired or replaced at your convenience.Of course, it is best to replace the spare with afull-size tire as soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in good shape in case it isneeded again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compact sparecan get caught on the rails. That can damagethe tire and wheel, and maybe other parts ofyour vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheelwith other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keepthe spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not usetire chains on your compact spare.

407

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look its bestif it is cleaned often. Although not always visible,dust and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery.Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plasticsurfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommendedto remove particles from your upholstery. It isimportant to keep your upholstery from becomingand remaining heavily soiled. Soils should beremoved as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’sinterior may experience extremes of heat thatcould cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require morefrequent cleaning. Use care because newspapersand garments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for which

they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the integrated radio antenna and the rearwindow defogger. When cleaning the glass onyour vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glasscleaner.

Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to allsafety instructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.

Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary,you can also obtain a product from your dealerto remove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

408

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachmentfrequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canistervacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may onlybe used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.For soils, always try to remove them first with plainwater or club soda. Before cleaning, gently removeas much of the soil as possible using one of thefollowing techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

409

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result,clean the entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed,a paper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently change theappearance and feel of your leather and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents toclean your vehicle’s interior because they canalter the appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner. Never use shoe polish onyour leather.

410

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be usedto remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution can be used to gently remove dustand dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers onplastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protect softplastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and are notrecommended. Do not use silicone or wax-basedproducts, or those containing organic solvents toclean your vehicle’s interior because they can alterthe appearance by increasing the gloss in anon-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase glosson your instrument panel. The increase ingloss may cause annoying reflections in thewindshield and even make it difficult to seethrough the windshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required. See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 445.

411

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not use strongsoaps or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse thevehicle well, removing all soap residue completely.Approved cleaning products can be obtained fromyour dealer. See Vehicle Care/AppearanceMaterials on page 416. Do not use cleaning agentsthat are petroleum based, or that contain acid orabrasives. All cleaning agents should be flushedpromptly and not allowed to dry on the surface,or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surfacescratches and water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft clothand a car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 412.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 416.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxesand polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishesthat are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

412

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary,use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safefor painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle ina garage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield and Wiper BladesClean the outside of the windshield with glasscleaner.

Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth orpaper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid ora mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughlywhen cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime,sap, and a buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatmentsmay cause wiper streaking. Replace the wiperblades if they are worn or damaged.

Wipers can be damaged by:

• Extreme dusty conditions

• Sand and salt

• Heat and sun

• Snow and ice, without proper removal

413

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damagethe surface of the wheel(s). The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use only approved cleaners on aluminumor chrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damage thealuminum or chrome-plated wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Neverdrive a vehicle equipped with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through an automaticcar wash that uses silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying atire dressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

414

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the body repairshop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be correctedin your dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal and dustcontrol can collect on the underbody. If these arenot removed, corrosion and rust can develop on theunderbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,and exhaust system even though they havecorrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materialsfrom the underbody with plain water. Cleanany areas where mud and debris can collect.Dirt packed in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do thisfor you.

415

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutantscan fall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, wewill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials

Description Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and Road OilRemover

Removes tar, road oil,and asphalt.

Chrome Cleaner andPolish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White Sidewall TireCleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Description Usage

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and Wire WheelCleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onand wipe off.

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches, and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire Shine LowGloss

Cleans, shines, andprotects in one step.No wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleansand lightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

416

Description Usage

Spot Lifter

Quickly removes spotsand stains from carpets,vinyl, and clothupholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

417

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 95.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by aninternal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motoroverheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If the overload iscaused by some electrical problem, have it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsFuses in the fuse block protect the power windows.When the current load is too heavy, the fuse opensprotecting the circuit until the problem is fixed.

418

FusesThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by a combination of fuses,circuit breakers and fusible links. This greatlyreduces the chance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure to replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

There are three fuse blocks in your vehicle: onein the center of the instrument panel, one inthe engine compartment and one in the trunk.

There is a fuse puller located on the instrumentpanel fuse block. It can be used to easily removefuses from the fuse block.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe instrument panel fuse block is located onthe passenger’s side of the vehicle, on the lowerportion of the instrument panel console nearthe floor.

Remove the console cover to access the fuseblock, then remove the fuse block cover to accessthe fuses.

419

Your vehicle may not be equipped with all the fuses and features listed.

420

Fuses Usage

POWERMIRRORS Power Mirrors

EPS Electric Power Steering

RUN/CRANK Cruise Control Switch, PassengerAirbag Status Indicator, DSC Switch

HVACBLOWER HIGH

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningBlower - High Speed Relay

CLUSTER/THEFT

Instrument Panel Cluster,Theft Deterrent System

ONSTAR OnStar®

NOTINSTALLED Not Used

AIRBAG (IGN) Airbag (Ignition)

HVAC CTRL(BATT)

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningControl Diagnostic Link Connector(Battery)

PEDAL Adjustable Pedals

WIPER SW Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

IGN SENSOR Ignition Switch

STR/WHLILLUM

Steering Wheel ControlsBacklighting

Fuses Usage


RADIO Audio System

INTERIORLIGHTS Interior Lamps

REAR WIPER Not Used

POWERWINDOWS Power Windows (Sedan)

HVAC CTRL(IGN)

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningControl (Ignition)

HVACBLOWER

Heating Ventilation Air ConditioningBlower Switch

DOOR LOCK Door Locks

ROOF/HEATSEAT

Sunroof, Heated Seat, PowerWindows (Coupe, RetractableHardtop), Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror, Compass



421

Fuses Usage

AIRBAG(BATT) Airbag (Battery)

SPARE FUSEHOLDER Spare Fuse Holder




FUSE PULLER Fuse Puller

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockYour vehicle may not be equipped with allthe fuses and features listed.

The engine compartment fuse block is locatedon the driver’s side of the engine compartment,near the battery.

422

Fuses Usage

1 Air Conditioner Clutch

2 Electronic Throttle Control

3 Engine Control Module (IGN 1)(LZ4,LZ9)

Fuses Usage

4 Transaxle Control Module Ignition 1

5 Mass Airflow Sensor (LY7)

6 Emission

423

Fuses Usage

7 Left Headlamp Low Beam

8 Horn

9 Right Headlamp Low Beam

10 Front Fog Lamps

11 Left Headlamp High Beam

12 Right Headlamp High Beam

13 Engine Control Module (BATT)(LE5, LY7)

14 Windshield Wiper

15 Anti-lock Brake System (IGN 1)

16 Engine Control Module (IGN 1)(LE5, LY7)

17 Cooling Fan 1

18 Cooling Fan 2

19 Run Relay, Heating, Ventilation, AirConditioning Blower

20 Body Control Module 1

21 Body Control Module Run/Crank

Fuses Usage

22 Rear Electrical Center 1

23 Rear Electrical Center 2

24 Anti-lock Brake System

25 Body Control Module 2

26 Starter

41 Electric Power Steering

42 Transaxle Control Module Battery

43 Ignition Module (LE5, LZ4, LZ9), OddCylinder Injectors/Ignition Coils (LY7)

44 Injectors (LE5, LZ4, LZ9), EvenCylinder Injectors/Ignition Coils (LY7)

45 Rear Oxygen Sensors

46 Daytime Running Lamps

47 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

50 Front Power Windows Coupe/Retractable Hardtop

51 Engine Control Module (BATT)(LZ4, LZ9)

424

Relays Usage

28 Cooling Fan 1

29 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel

30 Cooling Fan 2

31 Starter

32 Run/Crank, Ignition

33 Powertrain

34 Air Conditioning Clutch

35 High Beam

36 Front Fog Lamps

37 Horn

38 Low Beam

39 Windshield Wiper 1

40 Windshield Wiper 2

48 Daytime Running Lamps

49 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp

Diodes Usage

27 Wiper

Rear Compartment Fuse Block

The rear compartment fuse block is locatedin the trunk of the vehicle. Access the fuseblock through the trunk panel on the driver’sside of the rear cargo area.

425

Fuses Usage

1 Rear Quarter Windows (RetractableHardtop Only)

2 Driver Seat Controls

3 Retractable Hardtop

Fuses Usage

4 Not Used

5 Emission 2, Canister Vent Solenoid

6 Park Lamps, Instrument PanelDimming

426

Fuses Usage

7 Not Used

8 Not Used

9 Sliding Panel Roof

10 Sunroof Controls

11 Not Used

12 Retractable Hardtop Controller

13 Audio Amplifier

14 Heated Seat Controls

15 Not Used

16 Remote Keyless Entry System,XM Satellite Radio

17 Back-up Lamps

18 Not Used

19 Not Used

20 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary PowerOutlet

21 Not Used

22 Trunk Release

Fuses Usage

23 Rear Defog

24 Not Used

25 Fuel Pump

Relays Usage

26 Rear Window Defogger

27 Park Lamps

28 Not Used

29 Not Used

30 Not Used

31 Not Used

32 Not Used

33 Back-up Lamps

34 Not Used

35 Not Used

36 Trunk Release

37 Fuel Pump

38 (Diode) Cargo Lamp

427

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 445 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerantcharge amount, see the refrigerant caution

label located under the hood. See yourdealer for more information.

Automatic Transaxle

Automatic 4-Speed 4T65 Transaxle 7.4 qt 7.0 L



Manual Transaxle 3.1 qt 2.9 L

Cooling System

2.4L Engine 7.5 qt 7.1 L

3.5L, 3.6L, 3.9L V6 Engines 9.7 qt 9.2 L

428

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 5.0 qt 4.7 L

3.5L and 3.9L Engines 4.0 qt 3.8 L

3.6L Engine 5.5 qt 5.2 L

Fuel Tank 16.3 gal 61.7 L

Wheel Nut Torque 100 lb ft 140 Y

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in thismanual.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 Engine B Automatic 0.040 inches (1.01 mm)

3.5L V6 Engine N Automatic 0.040 inches (1.10 mm)

3.6L V6 Engine 7 Automatic 0.043 inches (1.10 mm)

3.9L V6 Engine 1 AutomaticManual 0.040 inches (1.10 mm)

429

✍ NOTES

430

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 432Introduction ............................................... 432Maintenance Requirements ........................ 432Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 432Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 433Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 434Additional Required Services ..................... 437Maintenance Footnotes .............................. 438

Owner Checks and Services ..................... 440At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 441At Least Once a Month ............................. 441At Least Once a Year ............................... 442Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ........ 445Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 446Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 447Maintenance Record .................................. 449

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

431

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?The Plan supplements your new vehiclewarranties. See your Warranty and OwnerAssistance booklet or your dealer for details.

Maintenance Requirements

Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, replacement parts, andrecommended fluids and lubricants asprescribed in this manual are necessary to keepyour vehicle in good working condition. Anydamage caused by failure to follow scheduledmaintenance might not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps tokeep your vehicle in good working condition,but also helps the environment. All recommendedmaintenance is important. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrong tireinflation can increase the level of emissions fromyour vehicle. To help protect our environment, andto keep your vehicle in good condition, be sure tomaintain your vehicle properly.

432

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to help you keep yourvehicle in good working condition. But we do notknow exactly how you will drive it. You may drivevery short distances only a few times a week.Or you may drive long distances all the time invery hot, dusty weather. You may use your vehiclein making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,to do errands, or in many other ways.

Because of all the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may needmore frequent checks and replacements. So pleaseread the following and note how you drive. If youhave any questions on how to keep your vehicle ingood condition, see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these limitson the Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 296.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 318.

The services in Scheduled Maintenance onpage 434 should be performed when indicated.See Additional Required Services on page 437 andMaintenance Footnotes on page 438 for furtherinformation.

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job.If you have any doubt, see your GMGoodwrench® dealer to have a qualifiedtechnician do the work.

Some maintenance services can be complex.So, unless you are technically qualified andhave the necessary equipment, you should haveyour GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.

433

When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer foryour service needs, you will know that GM-trainedand supported service technicians will performthe work using genuine GM parts.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 471.

Owner Checks and Services on page 440 tells youwhat should be checked, when to check it, andwhat you can easily do to help keep your vehiclein good condition.

The proper replacement parts, fluids, andlubricants to use are listed in RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 445 and NormalMaintenance Replacement Parts on page 446.When your vehicle is serviced, make sure theseare used. All parts should be replaced and allnecessary repairs done before you or anyoneelse drives the vehicle. We recommend theuse of genuine GM parts.

Scheduled MaintenanceWhen the CHANGE OIL SOON message in theDriver Information Center (DIC) comes on, it meansthat service is required for your vehicle. Have yourvehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you aredriving under the best conditions, the engine oil lifesystem may not indicate that vehicle service isnecessary for over a year. However, the engine oiland filter must be changed at least once a year andat this time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service technicians who willperform this work using genuine parts and resetthe system.

If the engine oil life system is ever resetaccidentally, you must service your vehicle within3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last service.Remember to reset the oil life system wheneverthe oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life System onpage 334 for information on the Engine Oil LifeSystem and resetting the system.

434

When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,certain services, checks, and inspections arerequired. Required services are described in thefollowing for “Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.”Generally, it is recommended that your firstservice be Maintenance I, your second servicebe Maintenance II, and that you alternateMaintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.However, in some cases, Maintenance II maybe required more often.

Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if themessage comes on within 10 months since thevehicle was purchased or Maintenance IIwas performed.

Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if theprevious service performed was Maintenance I.Always use Maintenance II whenever the messagecomes on 10 months or more since the lastservice or if the message has not come on atall for one year.

Scheduled MaintenanceService Maintenance I Maintenance II

Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 331. Reset oil life system.See Engine Oil Life System on page 334. An Emission Control Service. • •

Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). • •

Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 336. See footnote (k). •

Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection andRotation on page 386 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month onpage 441.

• •

Inspect brake system. See footnote (a). • •

435

Scheduled Maintenance (cont’d)Service Maintenance I Maintenance II

Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluidas needed. • •

Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”in this section. • •

Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b). •

Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c). •

Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d). •

Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e). •

Lubricate body components. See footnote (f). •

3.6L and 3.9L Engines Only: Check automatic transmission fluid level andadd fluid as needed. •

Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g). •

436

Additional Required ServicesThe following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicatedmiles (kilometers) shown for each item.

Additional Required Services

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

Inspect fuel system for damageor leaks. • • • • • •

Inspect exhaust system for loose ordamaged components. • • • • • •

Replace engine air cleaner filter. SeeEngine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 336. • • •

2.4L (Code B) L4 and 3.5L (Code N)V6 Engines Only: Change automatictransmission fluid and filter (severeservice only). See footnote (h).

• • •

3.9L (Code 1) V6 Engine Only: Changeautomatic transmission fluid and filter(severe service). See footnote (h).

• • •

3.9L (Code 1) V6 Engine Only: Changeautomatic transmission fluid and filter(normal service).

•

437

Additional Required Services (cont’d)

Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000(40 000)

50,000(80 000)

75,000(120 000)

100,000(160 000)

125,000(200 000)

150,000(240 000)

3.6L (Code 7) V6 Engine Only:Change automatic transmission fluid(severe service). See footnote (l).

• • •

3.6L (Code 7) V6 Engine Only:Change automatic transmissionfluid (normal service).

•

Replace spark plugs. Inspect spark plugwires. An Emission Control Service. •

Engine cooling system service(or every five years, whicheveroccurs first). An Emission ControlService. See footnote (i).

•

Inspect engine accessory drive belt.An Emission Control Service.See footnote (m).

•

Maintenance Footnotes(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses forproper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing,etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotorsfor surface condition. Inspect other brakeparts, including calipers, parking brake, etc.

(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose, or missingparts or signs of wear. Inspect electric powersteering cables for proper hook-up, binding,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect hydraulic powersteering lines and hoses for proper hook-up,binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.

438

(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replacedif they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated.Inspect all pipes, fittings and clamps; replacewith genuine parts as needed. To help ensureproper operation, a pressure test of the coolingsystem and pressure cap and cleaning the outsideof the radiator and air conditioning condenser isrecommended at least once a year.

(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. Clean the windshield and wiperblades, if contaminated. Replace wiper bladesthat are worn or damaged. See Windshield WiperBlade Replacement on page 373 and Windshieldand Wiper Blades on page 413 for moreinformation.

(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged safety belt system parts.If you see anything that might keep a safety beltsystem from doing its job, have it repaired. Haveany torn or frayed safety belts replaced. Also lookfor any opened or broken airbag coverings, andhave them repaired or replaced. The airbag systemdoes not need regular maintenance.

(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hingesand latches, hood hinges and latches, and trunklid hinges and latches. More frequent lubricationmay be required when exposed to a corrosiveenvironment. Applying silicone grease onweatherstrips with a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.

(g) Check system for interference or bindingand for damaged or missing parts. Replace partsas needed. Replace any components thathave high effort or excessive wear. Do notlubricate accelerator or cruise control cables.

(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filterif the vehicle is mainly driven under one ormore of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid and filter do not requirechanging.

439

(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer/retailer perform this service. SeeEngine Coolant on page 344 for what to use.Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressurecap, and filler neck. Pressure test the coolingsystem and pressure cap.

(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicatea problem. Have the system inspected andrepaired and the fluid level checked. Add fluid ifneeded.

(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions,inspect the filter at each engine oil change.

(l) Change automatic transmission fluid if thevehicle is mainly driven under one or moreof these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery

service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid does not require changing.

(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessivecracks, or obvious damage. Replace belt ifnecessary.

Owner Checks and ServicesThese owner checks and services should beperformed at the intervals specified to helpensure the safety, dependability, and emissioncontrol performance of your vehicle. Your GMGoodwrench® dealer can assist you with thesechecks and services.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 445.

440

At Each Fuel FillIt is important to perform these underhood checksat each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the properoil if necessary. See Engine Oil on page 331 forfurther details.

Notice: It is important to check the engineoil regularly and keep it at the properlevel. Failure to keep the engine oil at theproper level can cause damage to the enginenot covered by your warranty.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and addDEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. SeeEngine Coolant on page 344 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level inthe windshield washer fluid reservoir and add theproper fluid if necessary.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckInspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure theyare inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forgetto check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 383. Check to make sure thespare tire is stored securely. See Changing a FlatTire on page 394.

Tire Wear InspectionTire rotation may be required for high mileagehighway drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life Systemservice notification. Check the tires for wearand, if necessary, rotate the tires. See TireInspection and Rotation on page 386.

441

At Least Once a Year

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake on page 137.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be readyto turn off the engine immediately if it starts.

3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour dealer/retailer for service.On manual transmission vehicles, put the shiftlever in NEUTRAL, push the clutch pedal downhalfway, and try to start the engine. The vehicleshould start only when the clutch pedal ispushed down all the way to the floor. If thevehicle starts when the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down, contact your dealer/retailer for service.

442

Automatic Transmission Shift LockControl System Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could be injured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 137.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour dealer/retailer for service.

Ignition Automatic TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set,try to turn the ignition to OFF in each shift leverposition.

• The ignition should turn to OFF only when theshift lever is in PARK (P).

• The ignition key should come out only in OFF.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

443

Parking Brake and AutomaticTransmission Park (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You or otherscould be injured and property could bedamaged. Make sure there is room in frontof your vehicle in case it begins to roll. Beready to apply the regular brake at onceshould the vehicle begin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transmission inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Take careto clean thoroughly any areas where mud and otherdebris can collect.

444

Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtainedfrom your dealer/retailer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 331.

EngineCoolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 344.

HydraulicBrake System

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

WindshieldWasher GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

HydraulicClutch System

Hydraulic Clutch Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,in Canada 10953517) or equivalentDOT-3 brake fluid.

Usage Fluid/LubricantHydraulic

PowerSteeringSystem

(if equipped)

GM Power Steering Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,in Canada 89021186).

AutomaticTransmission

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

ManualTransmission

Manual Transmission Fluid(Part No. 21018899).

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood LatchAssembly,Secondary

Latch, Pivots,Spring

Anchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 109435474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770, inCanada 10953518) or DielectricSilicone Grease (GM Part No.U.S. 12345579, in Canada 992887).

445

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GMdealer.

Part GM Part Numbers ACDelco® PartNumbers

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter2.4L, 3.5L and 3.9L Engines 10366901 A2930C3.6L Engine 22676970 A1627C

Engine Oil Filter2.4L Engine 12605566 PF457G3.5L Engine 89017342 PF613.6L Engine 89017524 PF483.9L Engine 89017342 PF61

Spark Plugs2.4L Engine 12598004 41-1033.5L Engine 12591131 41-1003.6L Engine 12597464 41-9903.9L Engine 12591131 41-100

Windshield Wiper BladesDriver’s Side — 24.0 inches (60.0 cm) 19120742 —Passenger’s Side — 21.2 inches (53.0 cm) 19120743 —

446

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.5L V6 Engine and 3.9L V6 Engine

447

3.6L V6 Engine

448

Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed theservice, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements onpage 432. Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 440 can be added on thefollowing record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance I or

Maintenance II Services Performed

449

Maintenance Record (cont’d)



450




451




452

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 454Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 454Online Owner Center ................................. 457Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY) Users .................. 458Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 458GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 459Roadside Assistance Program ................... 460Courtesy Transportation ............................. 463Collision Damage Repair ........................... 465

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 469Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government ..................... 469Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government ............................ 470Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 470Service Publications Ordering Information ... 471

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ......... 473Event Data Recorders ............................... 473OnStar ...................................................... 474Navigation System ..................................... 474Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) ........ 474

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

453

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are important toyour dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or the operation of yourvehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s salesor service departments. Sometimes, however,despite the best intentions of all concerned,misunderstandings can occur. If your concern hasnot been resolved to your satisfaction, the followingsteps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the ownerof the dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership without furtherhelp, in the U.S., contact the Pontiac CustomerAssistance Center by calling 1-800-762-2737.In Canada, contact General Motors of CanadaCustomer Communication Centre in Oshawaby calling 1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to give theCustomer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration or title, orthe plate at the top left of the instrument paneland visible through the windshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Pontiac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

454

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlinedin Steps One and Two, you should file withthe BBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of courtprogram administered by the Council of BetterBusiness Bureaus to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although youmay be required to resort to this informal disputeresolution program prior to filing a court action, useof the program is free of charge and your case willgenerally be heard within 40 days. If you do notagree with the decision given in your case, you mayreject it and proceed with any other venue for reliefavailable to you.

You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states andthe District of Columbia. Eligibility is limitedby vehicle age, mileage and other factors.General Motors reserves the right to changeeligibility limitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.

455

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you can call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

456

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for your GMownership needs. Specific vehicle information canbe found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers/retailers for servicenationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the My GMCanada section within www.gmcanada.com.

457

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withPontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))

Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE(762-3743)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

458

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America and CaribbeanIslands/Countries (Except Puerto Ricoand U.S. Virgin Islands) — CustomerAssistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants, canreimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipment required foryour vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

459

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743).

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 daysa year.

As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Pontiac RoadsideAssistance program.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. In Canada,a person driving this vehicle without the consent ofthe owner is not eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in Canada). Service toprovide diesel may be restricted. For safetyreasons, propane and other alternative fuelswill not be provided through this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present personal identificationbefore lock-out service is provided. In Canada,the vehicle registration is also required.Lock-out service is covered at no charge ifyou are unable to gain entry into your vehicle.A remote unlock may be available if you havean active OnStar® subscription.

460

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire ingood condition, when equipped and properlyinflated, is covered at no charge. The customeris responsible for the repair or replacement ofthe tire if not covered by a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start is covered at nocharge.

• Trip Routing Service (Canada only): Uponrequest, Roadside Assistance can send youdetailed, computer personalized maps,highlighting your choice of either the mostdirect route or the most scenic route to yourdestination, anywhere in North America, alongwith helpful travel information pertaining toyour trip.

We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly as possible,but it’s best to allow three weeks before yourplanned departure date. Trip routing requestswill be limited to six per calendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance(Canada only): In the event of a warrantyrelated vehicle disablement, while en routeand over 250 kilometres from original point ofdeparture, you may qualify for trip interruptionexpense assistance. This assistance coversreasonable reimbursement of up to a maximumof $500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expense youmay incur while waiting for your vehicle to berepaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts anda copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

461

• Alternative Service (Canada only): Theremay be times, when Roadside Assistancecannot provide timely assistance, your advisormay authorize you to secure local emergencyroad service, and you will be reimbursed up to$100 upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. Pontiac RoadsideAssistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438,Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.

Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in thecoverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Pontiac and General Motors of CanadaLimited reserve the right to make any changes ordiscontinue the Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

462

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

463

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completed whileyou wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GMhelps to minimize your inconvenience by providingseveral transportation options. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer can offer you one of thefollowing:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participating dealerscan provide you with shuttle service to get you toyour destination with minimal interruption of yourdaily schedule. This includes one-way or round tripshuttle service within reasonable time and distanceparameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts. In addition, for U.S.

customers, should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limited reimbursementfor reasonable fuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and besupported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rentalvehicle that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for anovernight warranty repair. Rental reimbursementwill be limited and must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you sign and completea rental agreement and meet state/provincial,local, and rental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may include minimum agerequirements, insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usage charges andmay also be responsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rental usage beyondthe completion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

464

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service,may not be available at every dealer. Pleasecontact your dealer for specific informationabout availability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment and qualityreplacement parts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish your vehicle’s resale value, andsafety performance can be compromised insubsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle was originallybuilt. Genuine GM Collision parts are your bestchoice to assure that your vehicle’s designedappearance, durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintainyour GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GM part, may bean acceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these parts isnot known. Such parts are not covered by your GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any relatedfailures are not covered by that warranty.

465

Aftermarket collision parts are also available.These are made by companies other than GM andmay not have been tested for your vehicle. As aresult, these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your dealer/retailermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair centerthat has GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the quality ofcoverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repaired withGM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switching toanother insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of your lease for poor qualityrepairs.

466

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help.Do not leave the scene of an accident untilall matters have been taken care of. Moveyour vehicle only if its position puts youin danger or you are instructed to moveit by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, callGM Roadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 460 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get acard from the tow truck operator or write downthe driver’s name, the service’s name, andthe phone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehiclebefore it is towed away. Make sure thisincludes your insurance information andregistration if you keep these items in yourvehicle.

• Gather the important information you willneed from the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company andpolicy number, and a general descriptionof the damage to the other vehicle.

467

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. Ifthey ask for a police report, phone or goto the police department headquarters the nextday and you can get a copy of the report fora nominal fee. In some states/provinceswith “no fault” insurance laws, a report maynot be necessary. This is especially trueif there are no injuries and both vehiclesare driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a private collision repair facility to fixthe damage, make sure you are comfortablewith them. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle Damage RepairProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take your vehicle there,or have it towed there. Specify to the facilitythat any required replacement collision parts beoriginal equipment parts, either new GenuineGM parts or recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts will not becovered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company may initially value therepair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this withyour repair professional, and insist on GenuineGM parts. Remember if your vehicle is leased youmay be obligated to have the vehicle repaired withGenuine GM parts, even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

468

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repairvaluation based on that insurance company’scollision policy repair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company. In such cases,you can have control of the repair and parts choicesas long as cost stays within reasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer/retailer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

469

Reporting Safety Defects to theCanadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

470

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service General Motorscars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis and service of yourvehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin referencenumber can be obtained by contactingyour General Motors dealer or by calling1-800-GM-DRIVE (1-800-463-7483). Thisreference number is needed to order the servicebulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

471

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualincludes the Maintenance Schedule for all models.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US +Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US +Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, specify year andmodel name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

472

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyYour GM vehicle has a number of sophisticatedcomputers that record information about thevehicle’s performance and how it is driven.For example, your vehicle uses computer modulesto monitor and control engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor the conditions for airbagdeployment and deploy airbags in a crash and, if soequipped, to provide anti-lock braking to help thedriver control the vehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer/retailer technician serviceyour vehicle. Some modules may also store dataabout how you operate the vehicle, such as rateof fuel consumption or average speed. Thesemodules may also retain the owner’s personalpreferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersSome information about your vehicle’s performanceand how it is driven may be recorded on variousmodules if a crash occurs. Some people refer tothese modules as event data recorders (EDRs).These modules may record several seconds ofpre-crash and crash data, such as data relatedto engine speed, brake application, throttleposition, vehicle speed, yaw rate, steeringwheel angle, lateral acceleration, safety beltusage, airbag readiness, airbag performanceand the severity of the collision. Unlike the flightdata recorders on airplanes, these modules do notrecord sounds or conversations.

473

To retrieve this data, special equipment and accessto the vehicle or the module that stores the dataare required. Certain data may also be sent to orretrieved by OnStar® (see below). GM will notaccess this information or share it with othersexcept: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, ifthe vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee;in response to an official request of police or similargovernment office; as part of GM’s defense oflitigation through the discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GM collects or receivesmay also be used for GM research needs or maybe made available to others for research purposes,where a need is shown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

Others may be able to retrieve this data if theyhave access to the vehicle and have the specialequipment necessary to download the data.

OnStarIf your vehicle has OnStar® and you subscribeto the OnStar® services, please refer to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions for informationon data collection and use. See also OnStar®

System on page 150 for more information.

Navigation SystemIf your vehicle has a navigation system,use of the system may result in the storage ofdestinations, addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information. Please refer tothe navigation system operating manual forinformation on stored data and for deletioninstructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in some vehicles forfunctions such as tire pressure monitoringand ignition system security, as well as inconnection with conveniences such as key fobsfor remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garage door openers.RFID technology in GM vehicles does notuse or record personal information or link with anyother GM system containing personal information.

474

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 316Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 96Additives, Fuel ............................................ 319Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 418Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ............ 127Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 336Air Conditioning .................................. 183, 187Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 198Readiness Light ....................................... 197

Airbag System ............................................... 78What Will You See After an

Airbag Inflates? ...................................... 88When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 85Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 81

Airbag SystemsAdding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 96How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 87Passenger Sensing System ....................... 89Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ....... 95What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 87

Antenna, Backglass ..................................... 256Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 256

Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystem .................................................... 257

Anti-Lock Brake System .............................. 265Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 201Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 414Care of Safety Belts ................................ 411Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 416Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 412Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 408Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 409Finish Care .............................................. 412Finish Damage ......................................... 415Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 411Leather .................................................... 410Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 415Tires ........................................................ 414Underbody Maintenance ........................... 415Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 416Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 412Weatherstrips ........................................... 411Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 413

Audio System .............................................. 220Audio Steering Wheel Controls ................. 254Backglass Antenna ................................... 256Care of Your CD Player ........................... 256

475

Audio System (cont.)Care of Your CDs .................................... 256Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 256Radio with CD ................................ 222, 228Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 238Setting the Time ...................................... 221Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................ 254Understanding Radio Reception ............... 255XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 257

Automatic Climate Control System ............... 187Automatic Door Lock ................................... 112Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 178Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ....................................... 337, 338, 340Operation ................................................. 130

BBackglass Antenna ...................................... 256Battery ........................................................ 360

Run-Down Protection ............................... 181Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 286Bench Seat, Split (60/40) .............................. 20Brake

Emergencies ............................................ 267Parking .................................................... 137

Brakes ........................................................ 357System Warning Light .............................. 200

Braking ....................................................... 264Braking in Emergencies ............................... 267Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 123Bulb Replacement ....................................... 366

Center High-MountedStoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 368

Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 366Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 366License Plate Lamps ................................ 372Replacement Bulbs .................................. 372Taillamps, Turn Signal, Sidemarker,

Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps ................................. 369, 370, 371

Buying New Tires ........................................ 388

CCalibration .......................................... 145, 147California Fuel ............................................. 318California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 317Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 428Carbon Monoxide .............. 114, 142, 290, 306

476

Care ofSafety Belts ............................................. 411Your CD Player ........................................ 256Your CDs ................................................. 256

Center Console Storage Area ...................... 153Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 368Chains, Tire ................................................. 393Charging System Light ................................ 200Check

Engine Light ............................................ 205Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 322Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 416Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 53Infants and Young Children ........................ 49Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 61Older Children ........................................... 46Securing a Child Restraint in a

Rear Seat Position ................................. 71Securing a Child Restraint in the

Right Front Seat Position ........................ 73Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 58

CleaningAluminum Wheels .................................... 414Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 412Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 409Finish Care .............................................. 412

Cleaning (cont.)Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 408Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 411Leather .................................................... 410Tires ........................................................ 414Underbody Maintenance ........................... 415Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 412Weatherstrips ........................................... 411Windshield and Wiper Blades ................... 413

Climate Control System ............................... 183Automatic ................................................. 187Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 192

Clock .......................................................... 221Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 343Collision Damage Repair ............................. 465Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ................. 42Compact Spare Tire .................................... 407Compass ............................................ 145, 147Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 119Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 264Convenience Net ......................................... 153Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 204Heater, Engine ......................................... 128

Cooling System ........................................... 350Courtesy Lamps .......................................... 180

477

Cruise Control ............................................. 173Cruise Control Light .................................... 209Cupholder(s) ................................................ 153Customer Assistance Information

Courtesy Transportation ........................... 463Customer Assistance for Text

Telephone (TTY) Users ......................... 458Customer Assistance Offices .................... 458Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 454GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 459Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 470Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 470Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 469Roadside Assistance Program .................. 460Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 471

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 178Defensive Driving ........................................ 260Delayed Headlamps .................................... 177Delayed Locking .......................................... 111

Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 317Dome Lamp ................................................ 180Door

Automatic Door Lock ................................ 112Delayed Locking ...................................... 111Door Ajar Reminder ................................. 111Locks ....................................................... 110Power Door Locks ................................... 111Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 112Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 113

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 27

Driver Information Center (DIC) ................... 210DIC Operation and Displays ..................... 211DIC Vehicle Personalization ..................... 217DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 214

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 279City .......................................................... 284Defensive ................................................. 260Drunken ................................................... 261Freeway ................................................... 285Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 288In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 280Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 295Winter ...................................................... 290

478

EEasy Entry Seat ............................................ 18EDR ............................................................ 473Electrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 418Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 422Fuses ...................................................... 419Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 419Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 418Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 425Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 418

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 336Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 205Coolant .................................................... 344Coolant Heater ......................................... 128Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 204Drive Belt Routing .................................... 447Engine Compartment Overview ................ 324Exhaust ................................................... 142Oil ........................................................... 331Oil Life System ........................................ 334Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...... 349Overheating ............................................. 347

Engine (cont.)Running While Parked ............................. 143Starting .................................................... 126

Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ................ 270Active Light .............................................. 203Warning Light ........................................... 203

Entry/Exit Lighting ....................................... 180Event Data Recorders ................................. 473Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 45

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 336Finish Damage ............................................ 415Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 256Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 168Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 171Flat Tire ...................................................... 394Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 394Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 404Fluid

Manual Transaxle ..................................... 343Power Steering ........................................ 354Windshield Washer .................................. 355

479

Fog LampFog .......................................................... 179

Fuel ............................................................ 318Additives .................................................. 319California Fuel .......................................... 318Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 322Filling Your Tank ...................................... 320Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 319Gage ....................................................... 210Gasoline Octane ...................................... 318Gasoline Specifications ............................ 318Low Warning Light ................................... 210

Fuses .......................................................... 419Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 422Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 419Rear Compartment Fuse Block ................ 425Windshield Wiper ..................................... 418

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 204Fuel ......................................................... 210Speedometer ........................................... 195Tachometer .............................................. 195

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 318Specifications ........................................... 318

Glove Box ................................................... 153GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 459

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 168Head Restraints ............................................ 15Headlamps .................................................. 176

Bulb Replacement .................................... 366Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 178Delayed ................................................... 177Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 171Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 366Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,

Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps ........... 366High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 171On Reminder ........................................... 177

Headlamps Off in Park (P) .......................... 177Heated Seats ................................................ 11Heater ................................................ 183, 187Highbeam On Light ..................................... 209High-Speed Operation, Tires ........................ 385

480

Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 287Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 288Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 322Release ................................................... 323

Horn ............................................................ 169How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 27Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 343

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 124Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 49Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 383Instrument Panel

Overview .................................................. 166Instrument Panel (I/P)

Brightness ................................................ 180Cluster ..................................................... 194

JJump Starting .............................................. 361

KKeyless Entry System ................................. 102Keys ........................................................... 101

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 376Lamps

Courtesy .................................................. 180Dome ....................................................... 180Overhead Console Reading ..................... 181Trunk ....................................................... 181

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 61

Latches, Seatback ......................................... 16License Plate Lamps ................................... 372Lift Seat, Power ............................................ 20Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 197Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 201Brake System Warning ............................. 200Charging System ..................................... 200Cruise Control .......................................... 209Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light .......................................... 203

481

Light (cont.)Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 203Highbeam On .......................................... 209Low Fuel Warning .................................... 210Malfunction Indicator ................................ 205Oil Pressure ............................................. 208Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 198Passenger Safety Belt Reminder .............. 196Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 196Security ................................................... 209StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 204StabiliTrak® Not Ready ............................. 204TCS Warning Light .................................. 202Traction Control System Active ................. 202Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning ................................................ 202Lighting

Entry/Exit ................................................. 180Parade Dimming ...................................... 181

Lights .......................................................... 176Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 171High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 171On Reminder ........................................... 177

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 296Lockout Protection ....................................... 113

LocksAutomatic Door Lock ................................ 112Delayed Locking ...................................... 111Door ........................................................ 110Lockout Protection ................................... 113Power Door ............................................. 111Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ..... 112Rear Door Security Locks ........................ 113

Loss of Control ........................................... 277Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 210Lowering the Retractable Hardtop ................ 157Lumbar

Manual Controls ......................................... 10

MMaintenance Schedule

Additional Required Services .................... 437At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 441At Least Once a Month ............................ 441At Least Once a Year .............................. 442Introduction .............................................. 432Maintenance Footnotes ............................ 438Maintenance Record ................................ 449Maintenance Requirements ...................... 432Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .... 446

482

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Owner Checks and Services .................... 440Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ....... 445Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 434Using ....................................................... 433Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 432

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 205Manual Lumbar Controls ............................... 10Manual Seats .................................................. 9Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 343Operation ................................................. 135

MessageDIC Warnings and Messages ................... 214

MirrorsAutomatic Dimming Rearview with

Compass .............................................. 147Automatic Dimming Rearview with

OnStar® and Compass ......................... 145Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 144Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 144Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 149Outside Power Mirrors ............................. 149

MyGMLink.com ............................................ 457

NNavigation System, Privacy ......................... 474New Vehicle Break-In .................................. 123Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 446

OOdometer .................................................... 195Odometer, Trip ............................................ 195Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 275Oil

Engine ..................................................... 331Pressure Light .......................................... 208

Oil, Engine Oil Life System ......................... 334Older Children, Restraints ............................. 46Online Owner Center ................................... 457OnStar, Privacy ........................................... 474OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 150Other Warning Devices ................................ 169Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 192Outlets

Accessory Power ..................................... 182

483

OutsideConvex Mirror .......................................... 149Power Mirrors .......................................... 149

Overhead Console Reading Lamps ............. 181Overheated Engine Protection

Operating Mode ....................................... 349Owner Checks and Services ....................... 440Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 415Parade Dimming .......................................... 181Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 138Shifting Out of ......................................... 140

Park (P) Headlamps Off in Park (P) ............ 177Parking

Brake ....................................................... 137Over Things That Burn ............................ 141

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 140

Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 198Passenger Sensing System ........................... 89Passing ....................................................... 276PASS-Key® III+ ........................................... 121PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................... 121Power

Door Locks .............................................. 111Electrical System ..................................... 418Lift Seat ..................................................... 20Retained Accessory (RAP) ....................... 125Seat .......................................................... 10Steering Fluid .......................................... 354Windows .................................................. 117

Pressure Cap .............................................. 347Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 45Privacy ........................................................ 473

Event Data Recorders .............................. 473Navigation System ................................... 474OnStar ..................................................... 474Radio Frequency Identification .................. 474

Programmable Automatic Door Unlock ......... 112

484

QQuestions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................... 26

RRadio Frequency Identification (RFID),

Privacy ..................................................... 474Radios ........................................................ 220

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 256Care of Your CDs .................................... 256Radio with CD ................................ 222, 228Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 238Setting the Time ...................................... 221Theft-Deterrent ......................................... 254Understanding Reception ......................... 255

Raising the Retractable Hardtop .................. 160Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 113Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides .................. 42Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 38

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimmingwith Compass .......................................... 147

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimmingwith OnStar® and Compass ..................... 145

Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 144Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 144Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 12Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .......... 445Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 302Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 102Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

System, Operation ................................... 104Removing the Flat Tire and Installing

the Spare Tire .......................................... 398Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 396Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 372Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 470General Motors ........................................ 470United States Government ....................... 469

485

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 97Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 98Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ................ 125Retractable Hardtop ..................................... 157

Lowering .................................................. 157Raising .................................................... 160

Right Front Passenger Position,Safety Belts ............................................... 37

RoadsideAssistance Program ................................. 460

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 295Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 447Running the Engine While Parked ............... 143

SSafety Belt

Passenger Reminder Light ....................... 196Pretensioners ............................................. 45Reminder Light ........................................ 196

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 411Driver Position ........................................... 27

Safety Belts (cont.)How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 27Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 26Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ............... 42Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 38Right Front Passenger Position .................. 37Safety Belt Extender .................................. 45Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 37Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 22Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 36

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 434Seatback Latches .......................................... 16Seats

60/40 Split Bench Seat .............................. 20Easy Entry Seat ........................................ 18Head Restraints ......................................... 15Heated Seats ............................................. 11Manual ........................................................ 9Manual Lumbar .......................................... 10Power Lift Seat .......................................... 20Power Seat ................................................ 10Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 12Seatback Latches ...................................... 16

486

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 71Right Front Seat Position ........................... 73

Security Light .............................................. 209Service ........................................................ 316

Accessories and Modifications .................. 316Adding Equipment to the Outside

of Your Vehicle ..................................... 318California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 317Doing Your Own Work ............................. 317Engine Soon Light ................................... 205Publications Ordering Information ............. 471

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 95Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 415Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 138Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 140Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 36Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 170Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 407Installing .................................................. 398

Spare Tire (cont.)Removing ................................................ 396Storing ..................................................... 404

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 428Speedometer ............................................... 195Split Bench Seat (60/40) ............................... 20StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 271StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 204StabiliTrak® Not Ready Light ........................ 204Starting Your Engine ................................... 126Steering ...................................................... 272Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ................... 254Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 169Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 153Convenience Net ..................................... 153Cupholder(s) ............................................ 153Glove Box ................................................ 153

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 294Sun Visors .................................................. 119Sunroof ....................................................... 154

487

TTachometer ................................................. 195Taillamps

Turn Signal, Sidemarker,Stoplamps, and Back-UpLamps ................................. 369, 370, 371

TCS Active Light ......................................... 202TCS Warning Light ...................................... 202Theft-Deterrent, Radio ................................. 254Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 119

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 119PASS-Key® III+ ........................................ 121PASS-Key® III+ Operation ........................ 121

Tilt Wheel .................................................... 169Time, Setting ............................................... 221Tires ........................................................... 374

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 414Buying New Tires ..................................... 388Chains ..................................................... 393

Tires (cont.)Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 394Cleaning .................................................. 414Compact Spare Tire ................................. 407Different Size ........................................... 389High-Speed Operation .............................. 385If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 394Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 383Inspection and Rotation ............................ 386Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 398Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 398Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 396Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 404Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 376Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 380Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 390Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 391Wheel Replacement ................................. 392When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 387Winter Tires ............................................. 375

488

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 302Towing a Trailer ....................................... 306Your Vehicle ............................................. 302

TractionControl System Active Light ..................... 202Control System (TCS) .............................. 268Control System Warning Light .................. 202Enhanced Traction System (ETS) ............. 270Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Active Light .......................................... 203Enhanced Traction System (ETS)

Warning Light ....................................... 203StabiliTrak® System ................................. 271

TransaxleFluid, Manual ........................................... 343

Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 135Trip Odometer ............................................. 195Trunk .......................................................... 114Trunk Lamps ............................................... 181Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 170Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 170

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 255Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 390

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 264Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 296Parking Your ............................................ 140Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ............ 473Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) .......................................... 417Service Parts Identification Label .............. 417

Vehicle PersonalizationDIC .......................................................... 217

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 192Visors .......................................................... 119

489

WWarning Lights, Gages

and Indicators .......................................... 193Warnings

DIC Warnings and Messages ................... 214Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 168Other Warning Devices ............................ 169Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 391Different Size ........................................... 389Replacement ............................................ 392

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 58Windows ............................................ 116, 117

Power ...................................................... 117

WindshieldWasher .................................................... 173Washer Fluid ........................................... 355Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 373Wiper Blades, Cleaning ............................ 413Wiper Fuses ............................................ 418Wipers ..................................................... 171

Winter Driving ............................................. 290Winter Tires ................................................. 375

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 252XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 257

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 432

490

Documents

2007 Pontiac G6 Owner Manual M - General Motors Canada · 2007 Pontiac G6 Owner Manual M 1. ... PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem, and the name G6 are registered ... Part No. 15864101 B